JP2023054284A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first-class ball entry means allowing entry of game balls to trigger a variation in a first pattern; second-class ball entry means allowing entry of game balls to trigger a variation in a second pattern; and control means for controlling a ball entry relative ration between the number of game balls entering the first-class ball entry means and the number of game balls entering the second-class ball entry means per unit time so as to be changeable at least in three stages when game balls are circulated in a circulation mode most advantageous to a player.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the second embodiment below)
a first-class ball-entering means in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the second symbol;
The number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the number of game balls entering the second type ball entering means per unit time when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player. a control means for controlling the relative ratio of incoming balls to the number of incoming balls so that it can be changed in at least three stages;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine of the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a success/failure table stored in a success/failure table storage area; It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is a perspective view showing a first starting port and its surroundings. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and a 1st starting opening. It is an explanatory view showing a conventional example. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of the modification 1 is equipped. It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and a first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 is equipped. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of Modification 4; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 5; It is an explanatory view showing a pair of nails and a first start opening provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 6. FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of Modification 7; FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting opening provided in a pachinko machine of modification 8; FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in a pachinko machine of modification 9; FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of a first starting opening in Modification 9; FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of Modification 10 and its surroundings. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of modification 11 and its surroundings. FIG. 21 is a front view showing a first movable piece of an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of modification 12; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sorting mechanism 120; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal electric accessory 53; 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing an electric role product open lottery. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of support modes that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls circulate during execution of the low-frequency support mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls circulate when high-frequency support mode A is executed. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls circulate when high-frequency support mode B is executed. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 3 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90; 4 is a flowchart showing state storage processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for support mode production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game round production. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process for setting an effect pattern; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120 normal electric accessory 53 and each start port in Modification 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-frequency support mode A in modification 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modified example 1; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120 normal electric accessory 53 and each start port in Modification 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode A in modified example 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modified example 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120, a normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode A in modified example 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modified example 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120, a normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 4; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-frequency support mode A in Modification 4; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modification 4; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120, a normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 5; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-frequency support mode A in modification 5; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modified example 5; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution mechanism 120, a normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 6; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode A in modified example 6; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modified example 6; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a normal electric accessory 53;

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Applies to other configurations:
D. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays images for design and effects.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted in the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Game balls entered into each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 enter the individual openings formed on the game board 30. Induced. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start opening 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start opening 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

When a winning lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

When the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 34 is performed, the second symbol display unit 37b changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the winning of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a liquid crystal display device 41 . The liquid crystal display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 . The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs the variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second pattern display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. . The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also performs the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted to when the jackpot is won. . Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams showing a pattern and a display surface 41a which are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, patterns representing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. It should be noted that the manner in which the symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the manner described above. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. In other words, it is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called dead nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. FIG. The main control board 61 is supplied with a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86 . A power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. "At the time of a power failure" is not limited to when a power failure of the commercial power source occurs, but also includes when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is turned off).

In addition, the main control board 61, as various detection sensors 67a to 67e, is provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. connected to multiple detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory open lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the winning to the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. A corresponding prize command is sent from main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the patterns on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types, such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for a ready-to-win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the pattern row to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C5 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is composed of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the game ball sequentially enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is chronologically stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33 or the second start hole . Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a (FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 as a success/failure table.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as lottery modes for winning lottery. The high-probability mode is a game state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low-probability mode. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7(a), under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, 15 random numbers are used to win the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, 30 random numbers are used to win the jackpot. Also, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group for the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

Returning to FIG. 6, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described next. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole . More specifically, it is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball has won the first start port 33, and the reservation information is stored at the timing when the game ball has won the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot types in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning lottery table for the high probability mode as a winning lottery table, and a winning lottery table as a mode of the lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) open/close execution mode. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a success/failure table for the low-probability mode can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the winning lottery using the high-probability success/failure table is more successful than the winning lottery using the low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C5 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode The number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role opening win is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time may be set longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start port 33 is higher than the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start port 34 is more likely than the first start port 33. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. can be done.

In addition, the configuration in which the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an open role is increased. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode has a low frequency It may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. Shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, by applying any one or any combination of conditions, even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode is increased good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to distribute a plurality of types of jackpots. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "6 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "24-27" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "28-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of a variable jackpot is 60% of the value of the "0 to 39" jackpot type counter C2, and the probability of a normal jackpot is "0 to 39" jackpot type counter C2. 40% of the value of The number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second start port 34 are the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot. , 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 12" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "13 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "24 to 30" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "31 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot win based on the winning to the first start port 33 and the second jackpot win. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the starting port 34.例文帳に追加In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the probability of winning the variable jackpot is 60%, the probability of winning the normal jackpot is 40%, and the first starting port 33 It is the same as the case of winning a jackpot based on winning a prize in , but the distribution between 16R and 8R has a higher probability of winning 16R than when winning a jackpot based on winning a prize in the first start port 33. It has become. The number and value of random numbers for winning the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

In this way, the mode of distributing the jackpot types between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 has a clear difference in the advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 out of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 . Note that if the lottery results in a loss, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Returning to FIG. 6, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described next. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port . Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is checked against a table to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the MPU 62 determines whether to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be realized, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming the reach line. , in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 performs a variable display of the symbol to achieve a reach. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the liquid crystal display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C5 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

In addition, a combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first start port 33, and the second reservation area A combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and this hold information is the special Corresponds to information.

A3. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

A4. Configuration of the first starting port and life nail:
FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 33 and its surroundings. In the drawing, the positive direction of the X-axis indicates the right side of the game board 30 in front view, the positive direction of the Y-axis indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the positive direction of the Z-axis indicates the front side of the game board 30. FIG. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right and left directions of the game board 30 in front view, the Y-axis direction indicates the up-down direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-rear direction of the game board 30. FIG. The X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are three axes orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the positive direction of the X-axis is called the "+X direction", the negative direction of the X-axis is called the "-X direction", the positive direction of the Y-axis is called the "+Y direction", and the negative direction of the Y-axis is called the "-Y direction". The positive direction of the Z-axis is called the "+Z direction", and the negative direction of the Z-axis is called the "-Z direction".

The first starting port 33 is constituted by a ball entrance member forming a ball entrance 33a into which a game ball can enter. Specifically, the first starting port 33 has a hollow box shape, a ball entrance 33a is formed on the +Y direction side surface, and the −Z direction side surface penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. A ball opening 33b communicating with an opening (not shown) is formed. A game ball that enters from the ball inlet 33a passes through the first starting hole 33, is discharged from the ball ball outlet 33b, and is sent to an opening penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first starting port 33 is configured by a translucent resin member.

As described above, a pair of nails 42 are planted above the first starting port 33 . Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is called "first nail 42a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is called "second nail 42b".

Each nail 42 provided in the pachinko machine 10, including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b, has a substantially hemispherical head portion 421 and a substantially cylindrical body portion 422, For example, it is integrally formed of a brass material. The trunk portion 422 extends straight, has a sharp tip, and has a spiral screw groove 422s (see FIG. 11) formed in a part of the outer peripheral surface. The nail 42 is driven into the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 up to the screw groove 422s, so that even if the game ball collides with the nail 42, the nail 42 is hard to come off from the game board 30 due to the impact. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nailer. At least part of each nail 42 may be configured such that its inclination is adjusted as necessary after being driven by an automatic nailing machine.

At least at the manufacturer's shipping stage, each nail 42 is generally perpendicular to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting opening 33 are arranged at a slight angle θ1 with respect to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a, that is, the +Z-axis direction. , θ2. The inclination angles of at least some of the nails 42 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are determined in order to match the ball output rate and the winning rate to the design values. The inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail below.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b and the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. 11(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line 1-1 in FIG. 10, and FIG. 11(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 in FIG. That is, FIG. 11A shows the first and second nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 when viewed from the +Y direction side (upper side) toward the −Y direction side (lower side) ( Hereafter, it is also simply referred to as "when viewed from above"). FIG. 11(b) shows a pair of nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 viewed from the +X direction side (right side) toward the -X direction side (left side) (hereinafter simply referred to as "viewed from the right side. (also referred to as “case”). In FIG. 11B, the second nail 42b located on the left side is hidden behind the first nail 42a located on the right side and cannot be seen.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the first nail 42a located on the right side when viewed from above is such that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the right (+X direction) by a first angle θ1. In terms of a general angle, the first nail 42a is provided so as to be in a direction inclined by +θ1 (counterclockwise θ1) with respect to the +Z direction.

In general, the pachinko machine 10 undergoes a performance test, and is permitted to be installed in each pachinko parlor on the assumption that machines manufactured in the same model generally maintain the same performance. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle when the vehicle passes the type approval test. The first angle θ1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees in this embodiment.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11(b), the first nail 42a is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the second nail 42b located on the left side when viewed from above is such that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (chain double-dashed line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the left (−X direction) by a second angle θ2. In terms of a general angle, the second nail 42b is provided so as to be inclined by −θ2 (θ2 clockwise) with respect to the +Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle when the vehicle passes the type approval test. The second angle θ2 is, for example, any value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees in this embodiment. Although the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are equal in this embodiment, they may be different instead. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are also angles intended by the manufacturer at the shipping stage.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11(b), the second nail 42b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being slanted as described above, as shown in FIG. is gradually widened from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side).

The entrance 33a of the first start opening 33 is an opening along the XZ plane, and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. 11(a). Specifically, a first edge (edge) 331 corresponding to one of a pair of parallel opposite sides forming the trapezoid, and a second edge 332 corresponding to the other of the pair of opposite sides. , a third edge 333 corresponding to one of the other set of opposite sides constituting the trapezoid, and a fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the other set of opposite sides constituting the trapezoid, and the entrance 33a is formed by Configured. The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 is the ball entrance 33a. , and the second edge 332 is located on the -Z direction side of the entrance 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the +X direction side of the ball entrance 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the -X direction side of the ball entrance 33a. It should be noted that the first to fourth edges 331 to 334 can also be said to be inner slope surfaces of the entrance 33a when measuring the inner slope.

In this embodiment, the length of the first rim 331 is longer than the length of the second rim 332 . Of the two interior angles at both ends of the second rim 332, the angle on the +X direction side is δ1, and the angle on the -X direction side of the two interior angles is δ2. (1) and (2) are satisfied.

δ1=θ1+90 degrees (1)
δ2=θ2+90 degrees (2)
However, θ1 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42a described above, and θ2 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b described above.

According to the formula (1), it can be seen that the third edge 333 is inclined by a first angle θ1 to the right (+X direction) from the +Z direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side. . According to the formula (2), the fourth rim 334 is tilted from the +Z direction to the left (−X direction) by the second angle θ2 with respect to the −Z direction end. I understand. The distance (breadth) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a gradually widens from the rear side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+Z direction side). there is

Therefore, the first and second nails 42a, 42b, and the entrance 33a of the first starting port 33, when viewed from above, the third rim 333 is the trunk portion 422 of the first nail 42a. , and the fourth rim 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the third rim 333 is aligned with the angle of inclination of the first nail 42a, that is, the angle between the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the perpendicular direction to the surface of the plywood 30a). ), and the fourth rim 334 defines the inclination angle of the second nail 42b, that is, the angle formed by the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the surface of the plywood 30a angle between the vertical direction).

A5. Effects of the Embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 may be tilted due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. The condition may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as in the first embodiment is used. As described above, the first nail 42a is inclined by the first angle θ1 to the right (+X direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) at the time of shipment. A first starting port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (in the -Y direction), as in the first embodiment. The first starting port P33 is different from the first starting port 33 of the first embodiment in that the entrance P33a has a rectangular shape. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the ball entrance P33a is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30 (the Z-axis direction).

In the conventional pachinko machine, the inclination of the first nail 42a may change from the time of shipment due to an accidental impact during transportation or aging, as indicated by the dashed line (42a') in the figure. There was a time when I was lost. In that case, the repair person needs to restore the first angle θ, which is the angle at the time of shipment. However, it is difficult for the repairer to grasp how much the first angle θ is inclined from the pachinko machine in which the inclination of the nail has changed. It required a lot of experience with adjustments and the use of special adjustment tools.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the entrance hole 33a of the first starting hole 33 is adjusted so as to match the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b intended by the manufacturer, which is the angle at the time of shipment. The orientations of the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in are predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a can be seen from the third edge 333 and the third edge 333 when viewed from above, relying on the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the ball entrance 33a. The inclination of each peg 42a, 42b is determined by the manufacturer by checking and correcting the inclination of each peg 42a, 42b so that the second peg 42b is parallel to the fourth edge 334 so that it is parallel. You can easily return to the intended tilt. Therefore, deviations in tilt of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in adjusting the nails 42 or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second ball openings 33a of the first starting opening 33 are used without separately providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b can be repaired, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

As a modification of the first embodiment, a third edge 333 that defines the angle of inclination of the first nail 42a, and a fourth edge 334 that defines the angle of inclination of the second nail 42b are attached to the periphery. may be colored with different colors. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the third rim 333 and the fourth rim 334 serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. can be done.

A6. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

A6-1. Variant 1:
The pachinko machine as Modification 1 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the life nail and the shape of the entrance hole formed in the first starting hole. , the rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of Modification 1, the same names and symbols are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 542a and 542b as life nails and a first starting port 533 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b varies from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). It was a composition that gradually widened toward On the other hand, in Modified Example 1, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (width) between the first nail 542a and the second nail 542b varies from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side ( +Z direction side). Specifically, the first nail 542a positioned on the right side is such that the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is shifted from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction) by a first angle φ1. It is provided so as to be in an inclined direction. The second nail 542b located on the left side is arranged such that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) by a second angle φ2. is provided in The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined angles, and in the present embodiment, are angles when the vehicle passes the type approval test. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are, for example, any value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees. Although the first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, they may be different instead.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the third rim 333 and the fourth rim 334 in the entrance 33a formed in the first starting port 33 is It was configured to gradually widen from the side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+Z direction side). On the other hand, in Modified Example 1, as shown in FIG. ) gradually narrows from the rear side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+Z direction side). Specifically, the third rim 593 located on the right side is configured such that the direction relative to the end on the -Z direction side is inclined by a first angle φ1 from the +Z direction to the left (-X direction). there is The fourth rim 594 positioned on the left side is inclined at a second angle φ2 from the +Z direction to the right (+X direction) with respect to the end on the −Z direction side.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of Modification 1 as well, the first and second nails 542a, 542b, and the ball entrance 533a of the first starting hole 533 are the same as those of the ball entrance 533a when viewed from above. A third edge 593 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 542a, and a fourth edge 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 542b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, relying on the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 at the entrance 533a, The nails 542a and 542b are inclined so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third edge 593 and the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth edge 594 when viewed from above. You can check and fix it. Therefore, deviations in tilt of the first and second nails 542a, 542b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine of Modification 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, there is no need to separately provide a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using the ball entrance 33a, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-2. Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as Modification 2 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the dead nail and the shape of the first starting opening, and the rest of the configuration is the same. is. In the pachinko machine of modified example 2, the same names and symbols are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b as life nails and a first starting port 633 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the first embodiment and modified example 1, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are arranged such that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the positive X axis. Alternatively, it was configured to tilt in the negative direction (right and left). On the other hand, in Modified Example 2, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged so that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is shifted from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the positive Y axis. It is configured to be inclined in the direction (upward). Specifically, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged along the Z-axis as shown in FIG. ), the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined upward (+Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) by a predetermined angle μ1. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the vehicle passes the type approval test. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the vehicle passes the type approval test. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, a value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees, for example.

In the first embodiment and modified example 1, the ball entrance 33a formed in the first starting opening 33 has a trapezoidal shape. On the other hand, in Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the ball entrance 633a formed in the first starting opening 633 has a rectangular shape. Therefore, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the +X direction side and the -X direction side, which constitute the entrance 633a, are configured along the +Z direction. On top of that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the surface 633S on the upper side (+Y direction side) of the first starting port 633 is moved upward from the +Z direction (chain line) with the end 633b in contact with the plywood 30a as a reference. It is configured to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 in (+Y direction).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, when viewed from the right side, the direction of the center axis of each body 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the ball entrance of the first starting hole 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2 configured as described above, the angle of inclination of the upper surface 633S of the first start opening 633 is adjusted so as to match the upward inclination of the nails 642a and 642b intended by the manufacturer. Predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, each nail 642a, 642b is arranged parallel to the plane 633S when viewed from the right side, relying on the upper surface 633S of the first start opening 633. The inclination of nails 642a, 642b can be checked and corrected. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 642a, 642b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in adjusting nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, the inclination of the nail can be repaired using the original flat surface 633S of the first start opening 33 without providing a separate member for checking the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-3. Variant 3:
The pachinko machine as modified example 3 differs from the pachinko machine as modified example 2 only in the direction of inclination of the dead nail, and the rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of Modification 3, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of Modification 2 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 742a and 742b as life nails and a first starting port 733 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 3. As shown in FIG. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In Modified Example 2, as shown in FIG. 14B, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged such that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the +Z direction (chain double-dashed line). It is configured to be inclined upward (+Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. On the other hand, in Modification 3, as shown in FIG. 15B, the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b are arranged so that the center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the +Z direction. (2-dot chain line) downward (-Y direction) by a predetermined angle ν1. The predetermined angle ν1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle at which the vehicle passes the type approval test. The predetermined angle ν1 is, for example, a value within the range of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

In Modified Example 3, the ball entrance 733a formed in the first starting port 733 has a rectangular shape as in Modified Example 2. As shown in FIG. However, unlike the modification 2, the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733 is inclined downward (−Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) with respect to the end portion 733b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined by ν1.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 3, when viewed from the right side, the direction of the center axis of each barrel portion 422 of the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b is the ball entrance of the first starting hole 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of 733a.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 3 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2, each nail 742a can be seen from the right side by relying on the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733. , 742b is parallel to its plane 733S. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 742a and 742b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 3, the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using the plane 733S of the first start opening 733, which is originally present, without providing a separate dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-4. Variant 4:
The pachinko machine as Modification 4 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the direction of inclination of the dead nail and the shape of the first starting opening, and the rest of the configuration is the same. is. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 4, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 842a and 842b as life nails and a first starting port 833 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 4. As shown in FIG. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 16(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the pachinko machines of the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 3, the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, are aligned in the +Z direction (two points chain line) to the right side (+X direction), left side (-X direction), upper side (+Y direction), or lower side (-Y direction). On the other hand, in Modified Example 4, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b, which are life nails, are arranged so that the center axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (chain line). It was configured to tilt in the following directions. The direction of this tilt is an angle that intersects both the X-axis and the Y-axis at an angle other than a right angle. Specifically, the configuration is as follows.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the first nail 42a located on the right side has a central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with the tip 423 as a reference when viewed from the upper side. (2-dot chain line) to the right (+X direction) by a first angle θ1, and as shown in FIG. was configured as On the other hand, in modification 4, the first nail 842a located on the right side is similar to the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 16(a). As shown in FIG. 16(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is a predetermined upward direction (+Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is configured to be tilted by an angle ξ1.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the second nail 42b located on the left side has a center axis direction of the trunk portion 422 with the tip 423 as a reference when viewed from above. When viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. It was configured along the axial direction. On the other hand, in Modification 4, the second nail 842b located on the left side is similar to the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 16(a). As shown in FIG. 16(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is a predetermined upward direction (+Y direction) from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is configured to be tilted by an angle ξ1.

In Modified Example 4, the ball entrance 833a formed in the first starting opening 833 has the same trapezoidal shape as in the first embodiment. However, the upper surface 833S of the first start port 833 is different from the first embodiment and the second modification, and is different from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction) with respect to the end 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. is inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in this embodiment, it is the angle when the vehicle passes the type approval test. The predetermined angle ξ1 is, for example, any value between 1 degree and 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of Modified Example 4, the first and second nails 842a and 842b and the entrance 833a of the first starting hole 833 are arranged so that the third edge 893 is the third edge when viewed from above. The fourth edge 894 is parallel to the center axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b. Also, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each trunk portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the entrance 833a of the first start opening 833. It's becoming

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 4 configured as described above, the first nail 842a can be seen from above with the help of the third rim 893 and the fourth rim 894 of the ball entrance 833a. The tilt of each peg 842 a , 842 b can be checked and corrected so that the third peg 893 is parallel and the second peg 842 b is parallel with the fourth peg 894 . Also, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833, the inclination of each nail 842a, 842b is confirmed and corrected so that each nail 842a, 842b becomes parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side. can do. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 842a, 842b can be easily corrected without the need for extensive nail adjustment experience or dedicated adjustment tools.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 4, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the original first starting opening 833 is replaced without providing a separate member dedicated to confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using this, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-5. Variant 5:
In the pachinko machines of the first embodiment and modified examples 1 to 4, there is a reference portion that serves as a reference for confirming whether or not the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, are parallel when the tilt is corrected. , a predetermined portion of the first starting port, for example, the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 of the ball entrance 33a shown in FIG. 11, or the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 shown in FIG. Met. On the other hand, in Modification 5, the reference portion is constituted by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port. A detailed description will be given below.

The pachinko machine as Modified Example 5 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remainder including the first and second nails 42a and 42b is different. are the same. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 5, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b as life nails and a first starting port 933 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 5. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. In FIG. 17(a), portions of the first and second nails 42a, 42b are omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the entrance sphere opening 933a formed in the first starting opening 933 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. An upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Elongated rectangular marks 951 and 952 are printed on the surface 933S. The marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side with respect to the right edge 993 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the first nail 42a located on the right side. On surface 933S, second mark 952 is printed to the left of left edge 994 of entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side. In addition, when viewed from above, the right outline of the first mark 951 is located slightly to the right of the right outline of the barrel portion 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left outline of the second mark 952 is positioned slightly to the left of the left outline of the trunk portion 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 5 configured as described above, the first nail 42a is aligned with the first mark 951 when viewed from above, depending on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The inclination of each peg 42a, 42b can be checked and corrected so that the second peg 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 so that it is parallel to the longitudinal direction. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool. Also, when viewed from above, at least part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b. , the visibility of the first and second marks 951 and 952 is high. Therefore, it is easy to recognize the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

A6-6. Modification 6:
Another example in which the above-described reference portion is constituted by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port will be described below as Modified Example 6. FIG.

The pachinko machine as Modified Example 6 differs from the pachinko machine as Modified Example 2 only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the rest of the configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. are the same. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 6, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of Modified Example 2 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b as life nails and the first starting port 1033 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 6. As shown in FIG. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the entrance 1033a formed in the first starting opening 1033 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. An upper surface 1033S of the first starting port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033 .

When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the first nail 642a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 6 configured as described above, each nail 642a and 642b is arranged in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 when viewed from the right side with reference to the mark 1051. , 642b can be identified and corrected. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 642a, 642b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Note that the first mark 951 and the second mark 952 in Modification 5, and the mark 1051 in Modification 6 are colored by printing, and the surface of the first starting opening 1033 is provided with unevenness as a mark. Anything you do is fine. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Also, the shape of the mark need not be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the shape can define the direction. For example, an arrow symbol or two points indicating a base point and an end point may be used.

A6-7. Variant 7:
The pachinko machine as modified example 7 differs from the pachinko machine as modified example 5 only in the orientation of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a and 42b are different. and the shape of the first starting port 933 are the same. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 7, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of Modified Example 5 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b as life nails and a first starting port 933 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 7. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(a) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. In FIG. 19(a), portions of the first and second nails 42a, 42b are omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11(b) in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the first starting port 933 is the same as that of the fifth modification. The entrance sphere 933a of the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Elongated rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed on this surface 933S.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side with respect to the right edge 993 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. As shown in FIG. That is, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, by printing the first right angle mark 1153 indicating the right angle, it can be seen at a glance that the first mark 1151 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. I'm trying to make sure it's guaranteed.

On surface 933S, second mark 1152 is printed to the left of left edge 994 of entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. As shown in FIG. That is, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30a with its longitudinal direction guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. FIG. In this embodiment, by printing a second right-angle mark 1154 that indicates a right angle, it can be seen at a glance that the second mark 1152 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. I'm trying to make sure it's guaranteed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19B, by printing a third right-angle mark 1155 on the right side surface of the first starting port 933, the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is positioned so that the game board 30 It may be understood that it is guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the forming plywood 30a. Note that the first to third right angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not necessarily required, and may be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 7 configured as described above, the degree of inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the first mark 1151, and the degree of inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the second mark 1152. It is possible to confirm the degree of inclination of the nail 42a. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 with the direction of the first nail 42a and comparing the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 with the direction of the second nail 42b, the first and The degree of inclination of the second nails 42a, 42b can be confirmed. Therefore, each nail 42a, 42b can be easily adjusted.

As another modified example, the orientation of the mark 1051 may be changed in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. Specifically, in another modified example, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30 when viewed from the right side. That is, in the sixth modification shown in FIG. 18, the mark 1051 printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30 due to its longitudinal direction. It is guaranteed that this will be replaced with the configuration printed on the plywood 30a. With this configuration as well, it is possible to check how the first and second nails 42a and 42b are tilted in the vertical direction.

The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in Modification 7 are colored by printing, but instead of this, the surface of the first starting port may be provided with unevenness as a mark. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Also, the shape of the mark need not be limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the shape can define the direction.

In Modified Example 7, the first mark 1151 and the second mark described in the first starting port 933 are used as the reference portion for ensuring that the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 is provided perpendicularly. 1152. On the other hand, as a modified example, instead of the mark, a projection made of resin, for example, may be provided on the game board 30 separately from the first starting port 933 . In short, any configuration can be used as long as it guarantees that it is provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. FIG.

Furthermore, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in modification 7 may be added to the first embodiment and modifications 1 and 4 thereof. According to this configuration, in addition to the right third rim and the left fourth rim 334 that constitute the ball entrance, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 also contribute to the inclination of the nail. Since the condition can be checked, the nail can be adjusted more accurately.

A6-8. Modification 8:
The pachinko machine as Modification 8 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the shape of the first starting opening, and the rest of the configuration including the first and second nails is different. are identical. In the pachinko machine of Modification 8, the same names and symbols are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1233 provided in the pachinko machine of modification 8 and its surroundings. In the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 7, the first starting port, for example, the first starting port 33 shown in FIG. The spherical mouth 33a has a first edge 331 on the front side (+Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the rear side (−Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+X direction side), and a left edge. and a fourth edge 334 on the (−X direction side). On the other hand, in modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the first starting port 1233 has a hollow box shape with the wall surface on the rear side (−Z direction side) removed. That is, the upper end surface of the first starting port 1233 is substantially U-shaped.

The ball entrance 1233a formed on the upper side (+Y direction side) of the first starting port 1233 has a first edge 1291 on the front side (+Z direction side) and a second edge 1293 on the right side (+X direction side). , the third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side), and a portion of the surface of the plywood 30a. A game ball entering from the ball entrance 1233a passes through the first start opening 1233 and is sent to the opening 30c penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.

The second rim 1293 on the right side (+X direction side) is oriented from the +Z direction to the right side (+X direction) with respect to the end on the -Z direction side, similarly to the third rim 333 in the first embodiment. It is inclined by a first angle θ1. The left (−X direction side) third rim 1294 extends from the +Z direction to the left (−X direction ) by a second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are the inclination angles of the first and second nails 42a and 42b at the time of shipment of the game machine, as in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 8 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, relying on the second edge 1293 and the third edge 1294 at the entrance 1233a, As in the first embodiment, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool.

The shape of the first starting port described above, that is, the shape of the first starting port in which the upper end face is substantially U-shaped, can be used in addition to the first embodiment, as well as the modified examples 1 to 7 described so far. , may be adopted.

A6-9. Modification 9:
The pachinko machine as modified example 9 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as modified example 8 only in the shape of the first starting opening, and the rest of the configuration including the first and second nails is are identical. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 9, the same components as those of the pachinko machine of Modified Example 8 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 9 and its surroundings. As with the first starting port 1233 in Modification Example 8, the first starting port 1333 has a substantially U-shaped upper end surface. In addition, the first starting port 1333 differs from the first starting port 1233 in Modification 8 in the following points (i) to (iii).

(i) In the first starting port 1233 in Modified Example 8, as shown in FIG. The third edge 1294 is inclined from the +Z direction by a first angle θ1 and a second angle θ2. On the other hand, in the first starting port 1333 in Modification 9, as shown in FIG. are parallel to the +Z direction.

(ii) In the first starting port 1333 in Modified Example 9, as shown in FIG. is described on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting port 1333. This is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b at the time of shipment of the game machine. Second numerical information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is described. In contrast, the first starting port 1233 in Modification 8 does not have such a configuration. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are numerical values indicating angles, for example, "5 degrees".

(iii) The first starting port 1233 in Modification 8 has an integral structure. On the other hand, the first starting port 1333 in Modification 9 is composed of a first part Pa and a second part Pb. The second part Pb is mainly the left side wall portion of the first starting port 1333 . The first part Pa is a portion other than the second part Pb. Initially, as shown in FIG. 22, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate bodies, and in the manufacturing stage, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined to form the first starting port 1333. is configured. First numerical information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. The printing of the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb is performed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined together.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 9 configured as described above, the first nail located on the right side can be detected by relying on the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first start opening 1333. The tilt of 42a can be checked and corrected. In addition, by relying on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting port 1333, the inclination of the second nail 42b located on the left side can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 42a, 42b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 9, since the first starting port 1333 is configured by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the first numerical information Na can be easily printed, and the second numerical information Nb can be printed on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb can be seen from the right side (+X direction side). , the second numerical information Nb located on the left side (−X direction side) is located inside the first starting opening 1233, so that it is difficult to print the second numerical information Nb at the time of manufacturing. According to the pachinko machine, since the first start port 1333 is divided into the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed, and the first start Manufacture of mouth 1333 is easy.

Although the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are described, instead of this, the information indicating the angle may be displayed in the form of display of the plurality of segment light emitting units. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it indicates information about an angle.

The first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 9 was of a type in which the upper end face was substantially U-shaped, but instead of this, the rear side (-Z direction side) wall surface It can also be of the hollow box type with a Also, the first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, but may be composed of three or more parts instead. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angle of the nail may be configured as described in the first embodiment and modified examples 1, 4, 5, 7, and 8 as well.

A6-10. Modification 10:
FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1410 provided in a pachinko machine as Modification 10 and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1410 is provided, for example, in the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the game board is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The electric accessory 1410 is a normal electric accessory, and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric accessory 1410 has a pair of left and right movable pieces 1411a and 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). The closed state is the state shown in FIG. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for a game ball to enter. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 24 of Modification 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is increased, making it easier for game balls to enter. A game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 is sent to the opening 1400 . Based on the entry of the game ball into the electric accessory 1410, for example, a winning lottery is performed. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the +X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b will be referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a", and the movable piece on the -X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b will be referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a". 2 movable piece 1411b”. As in the first embodiment, the +X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the -X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front.

A pair of left and right nails 1442a and 1442b are provided above the electric accessory 1410. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b. Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b will be referred to as "first nail 1442a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b will be referred to as "second nail 1442b". call. The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a, 1442b are the same as those of the first embodiment.

In the first nail 1442a, the center axis direction of the trunk portion with respect to the tip is inclined from the +Z direction to a predetermined inclination direction (for example, +X direction) by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees). are provided. In the second nail 1442b, the direction of the central axis of the body with respect to the tip is inclined from the +Z direction to a predetermined inclination direction (eg, -X direction) by a predetermined inclination angle (eg, 7 degrees). is provided. The tilting direction and tilting angle of the first nail 1442a and the tilting direction and tilting angle of the second nail 1442b are different and are set at the time of shipment of the game machine.

In the electric accessory 1410, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "first flat surface") Sa. A tip portion of the second movable piece 1411b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "second flat surface") Sb. In Modification 10, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Sa match the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface It is designed in advance such that the inclination angle and inclination direction of Sb match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first flat surface Sa define the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a. The surface Sb defines the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b by its inclination direction and inclination angle.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 10 configured as described above, when the electric role object 1410 is in the closed state, relying on the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a of the electric role object 1410, The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be checked and corrected to the state at the time of shipment. Further, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination of the second nail 1442b is confirmed by relying on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b of the electric accessory 1410, and the state at the time of shipment is obtained. can be modified to Therefore, the deviation of inclination of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b above the electric accessary 1410 can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool. be able to.

A6-11. Modification 11:
Compared to the pachinko machine as Modification 10, the pachinko machine as Modification 11 differs in the direction of inclination and the angle of inclination of the flat portion in the electric accessory, and furthermore, the first nail and the second nail are different. position is different. Other configurations are the same between the pachinko machine as the eleventh modification and the pachinko machine as the tenth modification.

FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1510 provided in a pachinko machine as Modification 11 and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1510 is provided, for example, in the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. The electric accessory 1510 is provided in the opening 1400 in the same manner as the electric accessory 1410 in the tenth modification. Since the opening 1400 is the same as that of Modification 10, it is given the same reference numeral. The electric accessory 1510 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511a and 1511b, similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in Modification 10, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). It is The open state is the state shown in FIG.

A first nail 1542 a is provided in the upper right direction of the electric accessory 1510 , and a second nail 1542 b is provided in the upper left direction of the electric accessory 1510 . In the first nail 1542a, the center axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip is inclined from the +Z direction to a predetermined inclination direction (for example, +X direction) by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees). are provided. In the second nail 1542b, the direction of the center axis of the body with respect to the tip is inclined from the +Z direction to a predetermined inclination direction (eg, -X direction) by a predetermined inclination angle (eg, 7 degrees). is provided. The tilting direction and tilting angle of the first nail 1542a and the tilting direction and tilting angle of the second nail 1542b are different and are set at the time of shipment of the game machine.

In the electric accessory 1510, the tip of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form the first flat surface Ha, and the tip of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to form the second flat surface Hb. . In the eleventh modification, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ha match the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface It is designed in advance so that the inclination angle and inclination direction of Hb match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a by the inclination direction and the inclination angle thereof, and the second flat surface Ha defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle thereof. The plane Hb defines the tilt direction and tilt angle of the second nail 1542b by its tilt direction and tilt angle.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 11 configured as described above, when the electric role object 1510 is in the open state, relying on the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511a of the electric role object 1510, The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. In addition, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory 1510 can be moved by relying on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b of the electric accessory 1510. can be checked and corrected. Therefore, deviations in inclination of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b can be easily corrected without requiring extensive experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool. In particular, the electric accessory 1510 treats the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b located at the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory 1510 near the tip positions of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b in the open state as the restoration targets. and the nail can be easily repaired.

In addition, in Modification 10, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored with a color different from that of the surroundings. Further, in Modification 11, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored with a color different from that of the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer can easily recognize that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail. can be done.

A6-12. Variant 12:
The pachinko machine as modified example 12 is different from the pachinko machine as modified example 11 in the shape of the first movable piece provided in the electric accessory, but is the same in the rest. In the pachinko machine of Modified Example 12, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of Modified Example 11 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 25 is a front view showing the first movable piece 1611a of the electric accessory provided in the pachinko machine of the twelfth modification. The electric accessory in Modification 12 is configured as a so-called electric tulip, similarly to Modification 11, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state) as indicated by the arrows in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a provided in this electric accessory corresponds to the first movable piece 1511a in Modification 11, and is the movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in front view).

The first movable piece 1611 a includes a movable piece body portion 1620 and a projecting piece 1630 projecting from the tip portion of the movable piece body portion 1620 . An end portion of the protruding piece 1630 opposite to the movable piece body portion 1620 forms a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "first flat surface") Ta.

A pair of nails is provided around the electric accessory in the twelfth modification, as in the eleventh modification. One of the pair of nails is the first nail 1542a in the figure. The first nail 1542a is provided on the upper right side of the electric accessory. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface Ta of the projecting piece 1630 provided on the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the tilt angle and tilt direction of the first flat surface Ta match the tilt direction and tilt angle of the first nail 1542a.

Although not shown, the second movable piece of the electric accessory in Modification 12 has a shape symmetrical about the Y-axis direction with respect to the first movable piece 1611a. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the second flat surface of the protruding piece provided on the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 24 of modified example 11). When the electric accessory is in the open state, the inclination angle and inclination direction of the second flat surface match the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modified Example 12 configured as described above, as in Modified Example 11, when the electric role object is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a of the electric role object By relying on Ta, the inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Similarly, by relying on the second flat surface of the first movable piece, the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, tilt deviation of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in nail adjustment or a dedicated adjusting tool. can do.

Also in the twelfth modification, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored with a color different from that of the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as references for repairing the inclination of the nail.

A6-13. Variant 13:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modifications 1, 4, and 8, the regulation means for defining the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board is the rim portion of the ball entrance of the first starting opening. On the other hand, as a modification, the regulating means may be part of the outer periphery of the first starting port, or may be any part of the first starting port. In addition, it is not necessary to be limited to the portion of the first starting port, and it may be the second starting port or a portion related to other spherical entrance members. Furthermore, it may be a portion possessed by a member other than the entrance member.

A6-14. Variant 14:
In the first embodiment and its modifications 1 to 12, nails are used to change the circulation of game balls. As long as it is a member, any structure such as a projection made of resin can be used.

A6-15. Modification 15:
In the above modifications 10 to 12, the electric tulip, which is a normal electric accessory, is used as the movable means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state. may be adopted. Specifically, a predetermined portion of the mini-attacker defines an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, instead of the normal electric accessory, a special electric accessory such as an attacker (big prize opening) may be employed. Specifically, a predetermined portion of the attacker defines an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Furthermore, as the movable means, instead of the electric accessory, a non-electric accessory such as a mechanical one may be adopted.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described. Components having the same functions as those of the above embodiments are described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, winning a winning game, generating a ready-to-win game, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. Further, in the following description, the case where the game ball is shot by operating the operation handle 25 and flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front will be referred to as "left It is sometimes expressed as "hitting". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

27 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33a, a first starting port 33b, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, a normal electric accessory 53, a variable winning device 54, and a swing. A minute mechanism 120 is provided. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The sorting mechanism 120 is arranged in the lower part of the center of the game board 30 . The distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 to two flow paths. Of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, one flow path guides the game ball to the first starting port 33a, and the other flow path guides the game ball to the first starting port 33b. The details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

The first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b are entrances into which game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the first starting port 33a is arranged at a position where game balls distributed to the left side of the game board 30 by the distribution mechanism 120 can enter. Also, the first start opening 33b is arranged at a position where game balls distributed to the right side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front by the distribution mechanism 120 can enter. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33a or the first starting hole 33b, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the first start port 33a or the first start port 33b is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the second starting port 34 is arranged between the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Incidentally, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 is not limited to three, and may be two or less or four or more.

The variable winning device 54 includes a large winning opening 54a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 54b for opening and closing the large winning opening 54a. The opening/closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 54a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54a of the variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are through gates that trigger a lottery for operating the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the through gate 35a is arranged in the sorting mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. Details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35b is arranged outside the distribution mechanism 120 and on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the electric role open state in which it operates in a predetermined mode. In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b are not reserved.

The normal electric accessory 53 is an electric accessory arranged below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first start port 33b. As described above, the normal electric accessory 53 operates in a predetermined manner when winning the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Details of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described later.

Here, the distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the sorting mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28( a ), the distribution mechanism 120 includes a distribution mechanism housing 121 made of resin. In FIG. 28, in order to show the inside of the sorting mechanism housing 121, the outline of the sorting mechanism housing 121 is indicated by a dashed line. The distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with an opening 122 through which game balls can flow in, and openings 123 and 124 through which game balls can flow out. Further, the distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with a left flow path R1 and a right flow path R2. Further, inside the distribution mechanism housing 121, a distribution rotation section 125 and a through gate 35a are arranged. The through gate 35a is arranged in the right flow path R2.

The distribution rotation unit 125 includes a rotation shaft 126 and is rotatable around the rotation shaft 126 . When the distribution rotation unit 125 rotates clockwise and counterclockwise, the bottom of the distribution rotation unit 125 comes into contact with the distribution mechanism housing 121. Therefore, the rotation range of the distribution rotation unit 125 is restricted. In addition, the distribution rotating portion 125 includes a left holding portion 127 and a right holding portion 128 that temporarily hold the game balls that have flowed in from the opening 122 .

An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 is shown using FIGS. 28(a) to 28(d). As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the distribution rotating portion 125 is tilted to the left, when the game ball flows in from the opening 122, the game ball is temporarily held in the right holding portion 128. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the weight of the game ball held by the right holding portion 128 causes the distribution rotation portion 125 to rotate clockwise, and the game held by the right holding portion 128 is The ball is released toward the right channel R2. The game ball released from the right holding portion 128 passes through the through gate 35a, flows through the right flow path R2, and then flows out from the opening 124. As shown in FIG. The game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b, or enters the second starting port 34 when the normal electric accessory 53 is operating. After rotating clockwise, the distribution rotating portion 125 maintains a rightward tilted state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(c), when the game ball next flows in from the opening 122, the distribution rotating portion 125 maintains the state tilted to the right, so that the left holding portion 127 temporarily hold the game ball in question. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(d), the weight of the game ball held by the left holding portion 127 causes the distribution rotation portion 125 to rotate counterclockwise, and the game held by the left holding portion 127 is The ball is released toward the left channel R1. The game ball released from the left holding portion 127 flows out from the opening portion 123 after flowing through the left flow path R1. The game ball flowing out from the opening 123 enters the first starting hole 33a. In addition, after rotating counterclockwise, the distribution rotating portion 125 maintains a state of being tilted to the left. Thus, the distribution mechanism 120 has a function of alternately distributing game balls flowing into the opening 122 to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. FIG. 29(a) shows the normal electric accessory 53 in the closed state. As described above, the normal electric accessory 53 is arranged below the sorting mechanism 120 and above the first start port 33b. When the electric role release is won in the electric role release lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or through gate 35b, the normal electric role product 53 is provided as shown in FIG. The movable piece 53a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter also referred to as opening).

As illustrated, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a. Further, although not shown in FIG. 29(b), the normal electric accessory 53 includes a general electric accessory drive section 53c for driving the movable piece 53a.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the projecting movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting hole 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, there are roughly two patterns in which the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. The first pattern is a pattern in which game balls flow in from the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and assist the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 to enter the second start port 34 . Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 flows out from the opening 124, if the movable piece 53a protrudes, the movable piece 53a moves the game ball to the second starting port. 34 to assist the ball to enter the second starting hole 34. - 特許庁The second pattern is a pattern that assists the game ball flowing down through the through gate 35b to enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the normal electric accessory 53, if the movable piece 53a protrudes, the movable piece 53a moves the game ball to the second It guides to the second starting port 34 and assists the ball to enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁In the case of the second pattern, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a It assists the ball to enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁

In any of the patterns described above, it is assumed that the normal electric accessory 53 maintains the open state until the game ball circulates over the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34. When the normal electric accessory 53 is closed before the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34, the above pattern does not apply. , the game ball that has circulated on the movable piece 53a does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 29(b), the normal electric accessory 53, which was in the open state, becomes the closed state, as shown in FIG. 29(c). That is, the projecting movable piece 53a is housed in the game board 30. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a plurality of types of opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 53, and the normal electric accessory 53 assists the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 for each type of support mode. different. In the support mode provided by the pachinko machine 10, the time (electric Variation time of accessory open lottery), winning probability of electric accessory open lottery, and opening time of normal electric accessory 53 are different. The details of the support mode provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described later. The distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 have been described above.

Returning the description to FIG. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b. When a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33a or the first starting hole 33b, the first symbol display part 37a displays a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the first pattern is displayed, a variable display or a predetermined display of the first pattern is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first pending display portion 37c displays the number of pending first starting ports (the first starting ports 33a and 33b) according to the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entering the first starting hole 33a or the first starting hole 33b are reserved as a total of the two first starting holes.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is performed, the normal figure unit 38 performs lighting display, blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. is displayed. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 54 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 54b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a liquid crystal display device 41 . The liquid crystal display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41, when the first pattern display portion 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entering ball of the game ball to the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the pattern of the corresponding Variable display or predetermined display is performed. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to performing a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b, or the second start port 34, but also the jackpot. A performance display during the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to when winning is also performed. Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

30A and 30B are explanatory diagrams showing a pattern and a display surface 41a which are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 30(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a pattern corresponding to the first pattern displayed on the second pattern display portion 37b.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal pattern or the second liquid crystal pattern. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 30(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 30(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when the game ball wins to the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or second starting port 34, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. A variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

FIG. 30(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a.

Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns of numerals 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the liquid crystal patterns shown in FIG. 30(a). A variable display that scrolls to or from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 30(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA is not limited to the mode described above. For example, the number of pattern rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of fluctuation display of patterns in the pattern rows, the number of symbols in each pattern row, etc., can adopt various modes of display of the liquid crystal patterns. be.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. The lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 is given to the player. This is one unit of notification processing. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34, 1 For each game round, either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is changed so that the display corresponding to the result of the lottery of the obtained special information is displayed after the segment display is variably displayed. Stop the segment display. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34, , in the pattern display device 41 for each game round, after the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the obtained special information is displayed according to the lottery result. The symbol row is stopped and displayed. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 30(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first suspension display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of suspension games based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and is a special The information refers to game rounds in which the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery has not started. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game round display). In addition, the number of pending game times that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display the pending display corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending game round display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the second reserved display area Ds2, the first synchronized display area Sync1, and the second synchronized display area Sync2. However, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be adopted.

B2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b), the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35a, the through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided at various entrances such as the variable winning device 54 and through gates are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) and the second starting port .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a general electric accessory drive unit 53c for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 53, a variable prize driving unit 54c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 54b of the variable prize winning device 54, and a main display unit. 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 54c so that the opening/closing door 54b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the general electric accessory drive unit 53c so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first start hole 33 ( When the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the second start When the entry of game balls into the opening 34 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory open counter C4 is used for the electric accessory open lottery for determining whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b), a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the ball. And each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in chronological order in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. remembered.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is ) or the game ball enters the second starting port 34 and moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). It is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. be.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big win, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). 1 reservation area Ra, and stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory open counter C4 is periodically updated, and at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e. After that, in the electric accessory execution area 64e, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state using the value of the electric accessory open counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the normal electric accessory 53 is controlled to open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the normal electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the big-hit random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the big-hit random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is the first holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33 (first starting hole 33a, first starting hole 33b). A success/failure table for collating with the big hit random number counter C1 stored in Ra, and a table for collating with the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. The success/failure table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the first start port. FIG. 33(a) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), and FIG. 33(b) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 33(a), in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Among the values 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values 0 to 3 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 34(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 34(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values 0 to 3 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 54 is opened and closed, but does not trigger the transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following four aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device in opening/closing execution mode (3) Winning lottery lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) after completion of opening/closing execution mode
(4) Aspect of support mode after completion of open/close execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, a plurality of types of opening and closing patterns (hereinafter simply referred to as "opening and closing patterns") of the opening and closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided, and each type of jackpot , one type of opening/closing pattern may be set corresponding to the . In this embodiment, one type of opening/closing pattern is set corresponding to each type of jackpot, and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing door 54b differs for each opening/closing pattern. The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of game balls entering the variable winning device 54 (winning a prize) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relative. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 54b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 54b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening and closing door 54b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the open state of the opening/closing door 54b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 54 may occur. In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 35(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 35(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b), and the second starting port. The allocation table for is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. - 特許庁

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 35(a), the distribution table for the first start port includes the first start ports 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). 16R probability variable jackpot B, 8R probability variable jackpot A, and 8R normal jackpot A are set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into. In this embodiment, of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 4" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, "5 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot A, " 20 to 39” are set so as to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot A.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode B, and the high-frequency support mode B continues until the next big win is won. . Details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot A, the number of opening times of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R probability variable jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode turns into the high-frequency support mode A, and the high-frequency support mode A continues until the next jackpot is won. .

In the 8R normal jackpot A, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and 100 game rounds are completed after the high frequency support mode A is started. The high-frequency support mode A is executed until 100 games are played, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 16R probability variable jackpot B, 8R probability variable jackpot B, and 8R normal jackpot B are set. In this embodiment, of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, "10 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot B, " 20 to 39” are set so as to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot B.

Since the 16R probability variable jackpot B has been described in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 35, the description here is omitted.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot B, the number of opening times of the variable winning device 54 in the opening and closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R probability variable jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode turns into the high-frequency support mode B, and the high-frequency support mode B continues until the next big win is won. .

In the 8R normal jackpot B, the number of openings of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Also, in the 8R normal jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and after the high frequency support mode B is started, 100 game rounds are completed. The high-frequency support mode B is executed until 100 games are played, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode B to the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when a jackpot is won is the number of game balls to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). There is a difference between the case where the big win is achieved based on the entry of the ball and the case where the big win is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantages for the player. is provided.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, the electric role opening lottery and the support mode will be described.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 36(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) in the low frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open winning is performed with a probability of 1/233. . When the electric role opening lottery is won, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. A mode of the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 during execution of the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

FIG. 36(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 36(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 are set as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 for winning the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open winning is performed with a probability of 231/233. . When the electric role opening lottery is won, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. The mode of the opening and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B are executed will be described later.

As described above, according to the success/failure table for the electric accessory opening lottery, the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B) is easier to win the electric role opening lottery than the low frequency support mode. is set to be

Next, details of the support modes that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: a low frequency support mode, a high frequency support mode A, and a high frequency support mode B.

[Infrequent support mode]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery is 1/233, and the symbol (normal symbol) variation time in the electric role open lottery is 10 seconds. In other words, it takes 10 seconds from the start of the electric role opening lottery to the start of normal symbol fluctuation to the stop display of the normal symbol to notify the result of the lottery. In addition, when the electric role opening lottery is won, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 second. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 (the time during which the movable piece 53a maintains the state of protruding from the game board 30) when the electric role opening lottery is won is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the normal electric accessory 53 is open, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the low-frequency support mode, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how game balls circulate when the low-frequency support mode is executed. In FIG. 38, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is shown in a closed state when indicated by a broken line, and in an open state when indicated by a solid line.

When the player hits left and circulates the game ball so that it enters the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball that enters the opening 122 flows leftward by the distribution rotation unit 125. It is alternately distributed to the channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 38(a), the game ball distributed to the left flow path R1 flows out from the opening 123 and enters the first starting hole 33a. As shown in FIG. 38(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state. is unlikely to occur. Therefore, there is a high probability that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed when the game ball flows out from the opening 124, and the game ball that has flowed out from the opening 124 enters the first start hole 33b. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, most of the game balls entering the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and the first starting port 33 (the first A game turn triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) is executed. In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, even if a game ball wins in an electrical opening lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the variation time of the electrical opening lottery is 10 seconds. In addition, since it takes about 0.3 seconds for the game ball to reach the ordinary electric accessory 53 after passing through the through gate 35b, the game ball passed through the through gate 35a that triggered the winning. However, the ball will not enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that has been opened due to the winning. In addition, the game ball that reaches the normal electric accessory 53 at the timing when the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state may enter the second start port 34 with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53.

Further, if, in the low-frequency support mode, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35b by hitting to the right, the execution is triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 35b. The probability of winning the electric role open lottery is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state is low. Therefore, the game ball passing through the through gate 35b is unlikely to enter the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, and the second starting port 34, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35b flows down as it is. The ball enters the out hole 43. Suppose, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is passed through the through gate 35b by striking to the right, and the electrical opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. , the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the low-frequency support mode is 3 seconds, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 is the second Since the time required to reach the starting port 34 is about 5.0 seconds, before the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reaches the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 It is closed, and the game ball that has triggered the winning of the electric role opening lottery will not enter the second start port 34.例文帳に追加

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the electric role open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electric role open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, it takes 0.05 seconds from the start of the electric role opening lottery to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols to the stop display of the normal symbols to notify the result of the lottery. In addition, as described above, when the electoral opening lottery is won, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface is 0.00. 1 second. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the normal electric accessory 53 is open, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the high-frequency support mode A, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how game balls circulate when the high-frequency support mode A is executed. In FIG. 39, the normal electric accessory 53 is shown in a closed state when indicated by a broken line, and in an open state when indicated by a solid line.

When a game ball is circulated so that a game ball enters the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122) by hitting left-handed, the game ball that enters the opening 122 is moved to the left by the distribution rotation section 125. It is alternately distributed to the flow path R1 and the right flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 39(a), the game ball distributed to the left flow path R1 flows out from the opening 123 and enters the first starting hole 33a. As shown in FIG. 39(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric role item 53 is opened. The probability of being in a state is high. Further, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and wins the electric role opening lottery, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to the open state at the time when the game ball flows out from the opening 124. In order to achieve this, the fluctuation time of the electric worker opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode A is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the electric role opening lottery is won, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric function that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a From the time when the fluctuation time (0.05 seconds) of the open lottery and the fluctuation time when winning the electric role open lottery ends, until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when winning the electric role open lottery, when the game ball flows out from the opening 124, the normal electric accessory 53 is open, and the game ball flowed out from the opening 124 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the normal electric accessory 53 .

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second start port 34, the normal electric role in the high frequency support mode A The release time of object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time until the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 and reaching the movable piece 53a flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34 is 2.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting hole 34. As shown in FIG. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, compared with the low-frequency support mode, when the game ball is distributed to the right flow path R2, the game ball is second-started with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53. The probability of entering the ball into the mouth 34 is high. In the high-frequency support mode A, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first start port 33b. In addition, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, when another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, not all game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the second starting port 34. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment passes through the through gate 35b when the player hits to the right in the high frequency support mode A and circulates the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b. The game ball reaching the normal electric accessary 53 is not entered into the second starting port 34. - 特許庁Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the normal electric accessory 53 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34. The average value of the time until it is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the open normal electric accessory 53, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed while flowing on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a. Since the ball is released from the normal electric accessory 53 before reaching the second starting port 34 and further flows downward, it does not enter the second starting port 34 . Therefore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the game balls entering the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the player's profit.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (normal symbol) in the electric role open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, it takes 0.05 seconds from the start of the electric role opening lottery to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols to the stop display of the normal symbols to notify the result of the lottery. In addition, as described above, when the electoral opening lottery is won, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface is 0.00. 1 second. The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery is 6 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the normal electric accessory 53 is open, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the high-frequency support mode B, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35b by striking to the right.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how game balls circulate when the high-frequency support mode B is executed. In FIG. 40, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is shown in a closed state when indicated by a broken line, and in an open state when indicated by a solid line.

When the player hits to the right and circulates the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the electric role opening lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the normal electric role item 53 is opened. The probability of being in a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and wins the electric role opening lottery, the normal electric In order to bring the accessory 53 into the open state, the fluctuation time of the electric role opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the electric role opening lottery is won, the time from the end of the variable time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric function that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b From the time when the fluctuation time (0.05 seconds) of the open lottery and the fluctuation time when winning the electric role open lottery ends, until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when the electric role open lottery is won, the game ball passing through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53 At the time point, the normal electric accessory 53 is open, and the game ball that reaches the normal electric accessory 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the normal electric accessory 53 .

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to enable the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the normal electric accessory 53 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second start port 34, The opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the through gate 35b and reaching the normal electric accessory 53 passes through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34. The average value is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting hole 34. As shown in FIG. In the high-frequency support mode B, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is 6.0 seconds. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 closes, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 . In addition, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, when another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball is normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode B, not all game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the second starting port 34.

Thus, in the high-frequency support B, when the player hits to the right, the game ball can enter only the second start hole 34 with a high probability. As shown in the distribution table for the first start port and the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. The expected value of the privilege given when a big win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is higher than the expected value of the privilege given when the game ball enters the second start port 34.例文帳に追加Suppose, in the high-frequency support mode B, if the game ball is circulated so as to strike left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 Since the game balls are entered alternately in the second start hole 34 and the game balls are entered alternately, there is an expectation of a benefit given when a big hit is won than in the case where the game ball is entered only in the second start hole 34 with a high probability by striking to the right. value is lower. Therefore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the game balls that hit right and pass through the through gate 35b is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the player's profit.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed so as to maximize the profit of the player, the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) state in which game balls enter only (low-frequency support mode state), state in which game balls alternately enter the first start port 33 and second start port 34 (state of high-frequency support mode A ), and a state in which a game ball enters only the second starting port 34 (high-frequency support mode B state).

B3. Game Flow Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in step F101, when the player starts playing, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is the low-probability mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect to urge the player to hit left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the low-frequency support mode, most of the game balls entering the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and the first starting A game turn triggered by a game ball entering the opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) is executed. The state of step F101 is executed until a jackpot is won in a game turn triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 (first start hole 33a, first start hole 33b) (F102: NO ).

In the state of step F101, when a jackpot is won in a game turn triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) (F102: YES), the jackpot is won. A round game corresponding to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is the 16R variable variable jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 performs the opening and closing operation and the round game for 16 rounds is executed, and if the 8R variable variable jackpot A and the 8R normal jackpot A, The variable prize winning device 54 performs opening and closing operations, and a round game for 8 rounds is performed.

After the end of the round game, the state of the game shifts to a different game state for each jackpot type of the jackpot just won. When the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. That is, in the case of the jackpot type that shifts to the state of the high frequency support mode B after the end of the round game, the process proceeds to step F111.

In step F104, when the jackpot type is not jackpot B (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, in the case of a jackpot type that shifts to the state of high-frequency support mode A after the end of the round game, specifically, the game to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) When the 8R probability variable jackpot A and the 8R normal jackpot A are won in the game cycle executed triggered by the entry of the ball, the process proceeds to step F105.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (F105: YES), proceed to step F109, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (for example, 8R normal jackpot A) (F105: NO ), and proceed to step F106.

In step F106, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to strike left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball entering the distribution mechanism 120 alternately enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34. enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball is executed in the order in which the game ball enters each starting hole. Therefore, in a state in which the game ball alternately enters the first start hole 33 (first start hole 33a) and the second start hole 34, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is triggered. and a game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are alternately executed.

In the high-frequency support mode A in the state of step F106, a game turn triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 is performed. Continue until the game is executed 100 times (F107: NO→F108: NO), and if the jackpot is not won before the game is executed 100 times (F107: NO→F108: YES), go to step F101 return to the indicated state. That is, it returns to the state of the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F106, 100 game rounds triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34 are executed. If the jackpot is won by (F107: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

In step F105, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

In step F109, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to strike left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

The state of step F109 is high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the state of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball entering the distribution mechanism 120 alternately enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34. enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball is executed in the order in which the game ball enters each starting hole. Therefore, in a state in which the game ball alternately enters the first start hole 33 (first start hole 33a) and the second start hole 34, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is triggered. and a game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are alternately executed.

Since the state of step F109 is the high-probability mode, the state of the high-frequency support mode A continues until a jackpot is won in the game cycle to be executed (F110: NO).

In the state of step F109, when a jackpot is won in a game turn triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 (F110: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

In step F104, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable jackpot B is elected in the game round executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b), When the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the 8R probability variable jackpot B, and the 8R normal jackpot B are won in the game round executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, the process proceeds to step F111.

In step F111, when the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot B (F111: YES), the process proceeds to step F112.

In step F112, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to strike to the right and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

In the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is assisted by the normal electric accessory 53 and enters the second start port 34. - 特許庁Therefore, a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

Since step F112 is the high-probability mode, the state of the high-frequency support mode B continues until a jackpot is won in the game round to be executed (F113: NO).

In the state of step F112, if a jackpot is won in a game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round corresponding to the type of jackpot. A game is executed.

In step F111, when the jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

In step F114, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to strike left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is assisted by the normal electric accessory 53 and enters the second start port 34. Therefore, a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

The high-frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game round triggered by the game ball entering the second start port 34 is executed 100 times (F115: NO → F116: NO), and the game is played. If the jackpot is not won before the 100th round is executed (F115: NO→F116: YES), the state returns to step F101. That is, it returns to the state of the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F114, if a jackpot is won before the game round triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34 is executed 100 times (F115: YES), the process proceeds to step F103. Then, a round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

The game flow in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above. As described in the flow of the game, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, when the game balls are circulated so as to maximize the profit of the player, the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first 1 starting port 33b) only (low frequency support mode state), the state in which the game ball alternately enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 (high frequency support mode A state), and a state in which a game ball enters only the second starting port 34 (state of high-frequency support mode B), the game progresses while transitioning between the three states.

Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects produced by the features will be described in comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. First, when a winning lottery (including a jackpot winning and a small winning winning if a small winning winning is set) is won in a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole. The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to is the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port as a trigger (jackpot winning, And, if a small winning is set, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given in the case of winning is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the benefits given when winning in the normal time is the expected value of the benefits in the normal time, and the expected value of the benefits given in the case of winning in the high-frequency support mode is the expected value of benefits in the high support mode. and

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "conventional pachinko machine") having a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional pachinko machine, in the initial normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when the game is started, game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first start port and the second start port are distributed. A game ball is put into the mouth alternately. When the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at high frequency, so that the game ball enters the second start port with high probability without going through the sorting means. Let

In a conventional pachinko machine, if the expected value of benefits at high support is higher than the expected value of benefits at normal time and the difference is to be increased, in order to increase the expected value of benefits at high support, second It is necessary to increase the expected value of the privilege, but if the expected value of the second privilege is increased, the expected value of the privilege at normal times will also increase (in the normal state, the game ball enters the first start port and the second start port). Because the lottery is executed by hitting the ball). In addition, even if the first expected privilege value is reduced, the expected privilege value in normal times is the average of the expected first privilege value and the expected second privilege value. It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, if the expected privilege value at normal time is relatively large, the expected privilege value at high support time is adjusted to within the range of the regulation. should be reduced. In other words, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected value of the privilege at normal time and the expected value of privilege at high support. In other words, it is not possible to provide a wide swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state among the game states other than the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, when the normal state (normal game state, state with the lowest expected value of benefits) shifts to the high-frequency support mode (the best game state, state with the highest expected value of benefits), the player's expectations are increased. cannot be triggered.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment circulates game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in a normal state, but the game balls enter only the first start hole 33a with a high probability. By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, when the player hits to the right, the game ball enters only the second start hole 34 with a high probability, so the second privilege expected value should be set high. Thus, the expected value of the high-support privilege in the high-frequency support B can be increased. That is, among game states other than the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide a wide swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34, The expected value of benefits at high support (during high-frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected value of benefits at normal time and the expected value of benefits at high support (during high-frequency support mode B), normal state → high-frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game from mode A to high frequency support mode B, the value of the privilege expected value to be granted gradually increases, and the normal game state excluding the opening and closing execution mode It is possible to provide a large swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the game state and the best game state.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be reduced by setting the expected value of the first benefit low. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is increased. That is, among game states excluding the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to provide per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special benefits within the limits of the regulation.

In addition, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects of the features are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first start port and the second start port. As explained above, this effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines illustrated above, but is also effective for pachinko machines equipped with two or more ball-entering sections that trigger different types of lotteries to be executed. to achieve its effect.

B4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S20104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 48) described later.

In step S20104, a ball entry process for the starting opening associated with the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process advances to step S20105.

In step S20105, a through-ball entering process associated with entering the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. The details of the through ball entry processing in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 42: S20104).

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step S20201, the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 detects whether the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (start winning). Determined by state. In step S20201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, external signal setting processing for outputting a signal to the game hall side management control device that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) I do. After that, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start opening 33 (first start opening 33a, first start opening 33b). After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20201, when it is determined that the game ball is not entered into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, and the game ball The detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 is used to determine whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 34 .

In step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S20207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S20211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 48), It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of suspensions incremented by 1 in step S20210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) Each value of CS is stored in the first memory area of the free memory areas of the second reserve area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, a first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (holding information), the winning lottery success or failure determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of game times, etc. are executed before the holding information becomes a target of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (first determination information ) as a pending command.

The hold command is based on hold information acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 and the ball entered. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the determination result (previous determination information) of the predetermination process before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b), the symbol display device 41 to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 in response to the increase in the number of reserved items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 43: S20213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines the success or failure of the winning lottery, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether or not reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The pending information is the main This process is executed before the winning lottery by the control device 60 is made.

In step S20301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of a big win, and determining whether or not a ready-to-win event occurs. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S20301, the process proceeds to step S20302.

In step S20302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S20302, the current destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 44: S20301).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S20401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 43) is read. After that, the process advances to step S20402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S20402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403 to store the success/failure table. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S20402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20404 to enter the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S20405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20406, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S20407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) refers to the distribution table for the first starting port, and if it is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, refers to the distribution table for the second starting port. After executing step S20407, the process advances to step S20408.

In step S20408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S20408, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S20408: YES), the process proceeds to step S20409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20408 that the variable probability jackpot is not supported (S20408: NO), the process proceeds to step S20410, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S20405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20411, and the entry to the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S20412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S20413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S20413: YES), the process proceeds to step S20414, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20413 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S20413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the preceding determination process (FIG. 44: S20302).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S20501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 43) is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process, and when the big win is made (S20502: YES), the process proceeds to step S20503.

In step S20503, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20503, the process advances to step S20507.

In step S20507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S20502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big win (step S20502: NO), the process advances to step S20504 to determine whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S20504 that reach occurs (S20504: YES), the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S20507 to store the acquired variable time information in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S20504, if it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S20504: NO), the process proceeds to step S20506, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is stored. By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S20507 to store the acquired variable time information in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the shorter the variable time. there is That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine ( FIG. 42 : step S20105).

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the game ball entered (passed through) the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). In step S20601, when it is determined that the game ball entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: YES), the process proceeds to step S20602. On the other hand, in step S20601, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the electric service processing in-execution flag is ON. The electric role processing execution flag is turned ON when the electric role opening lottery is executed triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), and the electric role opening lottery is performed. When the lottery result is a loss, it is turned off after setting the loss display, and when the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery is a win, the win display is set and the normal electric accessory 53 is opened according to the win. It is turned off after the processing ends. In the following, the electronic role open lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), the display of the lottery result (hit or miss) executed along with the lottery, and The opening process of the normal electric accessory 53 that is executed in the case of winning is also called the electric role process. In addition, in this embodiment, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) does not suspend passage of the game ball. That is, during the period in which the processing for the electrical work triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is newly ), even if a game ball enters the game ball, the power-up process triggered by the entering ball is not executed.

If it is determined in step S20602 that the electric utility process in progress flag is not ON (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to step S20603 to turn the electric utility process in progress flag ON. After executing step S20603, the process proceeds to step S20604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the electric service process execution flag is ON (S20602: YES), the through ball entering process is terminated.

In step S20604, the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) is moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S20702.

In step S20702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S20703.

In step S20703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S20702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S20703, the process advances to step S20704.

In step S20704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20706. In step S20706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S20706, the process advances to step S20707.

In step S20707, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20708.

In step S20708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the normal electric accessory 53 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is to be placed in the open state. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20709.

In step S20709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S20703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S20709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S20709: NO), in steps S20710 and S20711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S20711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (S20709: YES), the process returns to step S20703, and each process from step S20703 to step S20708 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S20703 to step S20708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 48: S20706).

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step S20801 (S20801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and this game round control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S20802. End the process. That is, when it is in the opening and closing execution mode, regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the special figure starting port 51, the game round is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when the fluctuating display of either the first pattern display portion 37a or the second pattern display portion 37b is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step S20802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S20803 to S20805 for game round start. In step S20803, it is determined whether or not the pending number CRN is "0". The case where the reserved number CRN is "0" means that the reserved number is "0" for any of the first start opening 33 (first start opening 33a, first start opening 33b) and the second start opening 34. means. Therefore, in step S20803, when it is determined that the number CRN of reservations is "0" (S20803: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20803 that the number CRN of reservations is not "0" (S20803: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20805, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step S20805, this game round control process is terminated.

In step S20802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S20802: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S20806 to S20815 is executed.

In step S20806, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20806, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 52), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S20806 that the variable time has not elapsed (S20806: NO), the process advances to step S20807 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step S20807, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20806 that the variation time has elapsed (S20806: YES), the process advances to step S20808 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the pattern display unit so that the pattern displayed on the symbol display unit determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 51) to be described later is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S20808, the process advances to step S20809.

In step S20809, it is determined whether any of the jackpot flags (in this embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot B flag, 8R probability variation jackpot B flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag A, 8R normal jackpot A flag) is ON. . In step S20809, if any jackpot flag is ON (S20809: YES), the process proceeds to step S20810.

In step S20810, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20809, when none of the jackpot flags are ON (S20809: NO), the process proceeds to step S20811.

In step S20811, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. In step S20812, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S20812: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is.

In step S20812, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S20812: YES), the process advances to step S20813 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is zero.

In step S20813, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is not 0 (S20813: NO), the game-time control process is terminated. In step S20813, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 (S20813: YES), the process proceeds to step S20814 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S20815 to set a low frequency support mode command. The low-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the support mode has changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S20815, the game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 49: S20804).

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S20901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 32) (hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 32) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S20901, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S20901: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S20902 to S20907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S20901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S20908 to S20913 is executed.

In step S20902, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20904. In step S20904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20905.

In step S20905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20905, the process advances to step S20906.

In step S20906, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S20907.

In step S20907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S20907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 of the normal process (FIG. 48). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S20901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S20901: NO), The process advances to step S20908.

In step S20908, 1 is subtracted from the second start reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S20909. In step S20909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S20910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20911.

In step S20911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20911, the process proceeds to step S20912.

In step S20912, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20913.

In step S20913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 of the normal process (FIG. 48). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 49: S20805).

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S21001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S21001:YES), it progresses to step S21002.

In step S21002, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 33(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S21004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003.

In step S21003, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S21004.

In step S21004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success determination (hit lottery) in step S21002 or step S21003 is a big hit. In step S21004, if the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (S21004: YES), in steps S21005 to S21012, to set the game result in the case of jackpot winning and to set the stop result process.

In step S21005, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S21005, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S21005: NO), proceed to step S21006 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 35(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the numerical value range of the 8R probability variable jackpot A, and the numerical value range of the 8R normal jackpot A. determine whether there is

On the other hand, in step S21005, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21007, and a distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 35(b)). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot B, and the 8R normal jackpot B. do. After executing the process of step S21006 or step S21007. The process advances to step S21008.

In step S21008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S21006 or step S21007 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S21008, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S21008: YES), the process proceeds to step S21009.

In step S21009, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S21009, the process advances to step S21010.

In step S21010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S21006 or step S21007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is 16R probability variable jackpot B, the 16R probability variable jackpot B flag is turned ON, when it is 8R probability variable jackpot B, the 8R probability variable jackpot B flag is turned ON, and when it is 8R probability variable jackpot A. Turn ON the 8R probability variable jackpot A flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21016.

On the other hand, in step S21008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is not a probability variable jackpot (S21008: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S21011.

In step S21011, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S21011, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S21006 or step S21007 is turned ON. Specifically, when the 8R normal jackpot B, the 8R normal jackpot B flag is turned ON, and when the 8R normal jackpot A, the 8R normal jackpot A flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S21016.

In step S21004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S21002 or step S21003 is not jackpot winning (S21004: NO), the process proceeds to step S21013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not they match.

In step S21013, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S21013: YES), the process proceeds to step S21014.

In step S21014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round which is the stop result for reach. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S21014, the process advances to step S21016.

In step S21013, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S21013: NO), the process proceeds to step S21015.

In step S21015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variation display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S21015, the process advances to step S21016.

In step S21016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S21017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S21017: NO), the process proceeds to step S21018 to set the first variation command. The first variation command indicates that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 (first start hole 33a, first start hole 33b). In addition to information indicating the presence or absence of reach and information on the fluctuation time set in step S21016.

On the other hand, in step S21017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21019 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S21016. After executing step S21018 or step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. That is, in the type command, as the information of the type of jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot B information, 8R probability variable jackpot B information, 8R probability variable jackpot A information, 8R normal jackpot B information, 8R normal jackpot A information, or , information on presence or absence of reach and information on outlier results.

The variation command and type command set in steps S21018 to S21020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the result display portion corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display portion corresponding to the current game cycle is specified to be the first symbol display portion 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second symbol display portion flag is ON, the second symbol display portion 37b is specified as the result display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S21021, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 51: S21016).

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S21101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step S21102.

In step S21102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S21102: YES), the process proceeds to step S21103.

In step S21103, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S21107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S21102, when it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won (S21102: NO), the process proceeds to step S21104 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S21104) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step S21102, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the winning lottery in step S21104. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S21104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S21105. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S21105, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S21107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S21104, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S21104: NO), the process proceeds to step S21106, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S21107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 48: S20707).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S21201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21201: NO), the process advances to step S21202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21202 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21202: NO), the process advances to step S21203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21203: NO), the flow advances to step S21204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game cycle that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S21204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205. On the other hand, in step S21204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21204: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. A high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to change the lottery mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to the low-probability mode. After executing step S21205, the process advances to step S21206.

In step S21206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. A high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S21206, the process advances to step S21207.

In step S21207, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started with the jackpot winning as a trigger. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process. After executing step S21207, the process advances to step S21208.

In step S21208, open/close scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in the round game is set. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 54b in one round game is 30 seconds. However, even if 30 seconds have not passed since the opening of the opening/closing door 54b, the opening/closing door 54b is closed when nine game balls enter the big winning opening 54a. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b is set in the opening/closing scenario. In the opening/closing scenario setting process, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, if the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 54b for 16 rounds is set in the opening and closing scenario, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot A, the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 54b for 8 rounds is the opening and closing scenario is set to After executing step S21208, the process advances to step S21209.

In step S21209, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step S21209, the process advances to step S21210.

In step S21210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal processing (FIG. 48). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot that triggered execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21210, the process advances to step S21211 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is ON (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step S21212 that the opening period has ended (S21212: YES), the process advances to step S21213 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21214.

In step S21214, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the big hit type is displayed on the round display section 39 . After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215.

In step S21215, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21202: YES), the process proceeds to step S21216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21216, the process advances to step S21217.

In step S21217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (S21217: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218. On the other hand, in step S21217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S21217: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step S21218, the open/close process period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S21219.

In step S21219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S21219, the process proceeds to step S21220.

In step S21220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing step S21220, the process advances to step S21221.

In step S21221, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step 40703 in the normal processing (FIG. 48). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period. After executing step S21221, the process proceeds to step S21222.

In step S21222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the ending period flag is ON (S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21223.

In step S21223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21220), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0" (S21223: YES), the process proceeds to step S21224.

In step S21224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21225, the process advances to step S21226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the flow advances to step S21227 to set an opening/closing execution mode end command. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S21223, when it is determined that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not "0" (S21223: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 53: S21216).

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S21301, it is determined whether or not the door 54b is open. If it is determined in step S21301 that the door 54b is not open (S21301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21302.

In step S21302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the door 54b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process (FIG. 53: S21208) is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 54b. If it is determined in step S21302 that the condition for opening the door 54b is met (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S21303, the opening/closing door 54b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S21304.

In step S21304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 54b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20703) of the normal process. After executing step S21304, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S21302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 54b is not established (S21302: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21301 that the opening/closing door 54b is open (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the door 54b are met. The closing condition of the opening/closing door 54b is that the continuous opening time (30 seconds in this embodiment) of the opening/closing door 54b set in the opening/closing scenario has passed, or the number that is set in advance for the big winning opening 54a (this embodiment In the form, it is established when it is detected that 9 game balls have entered. If it is determined in step S21305 that the condition for closing the door 54b is satisfied (S21305: YES), the process proceeds to step S21306.

In step S21306, the opening/closing door 54b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 54b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20303) of the normal process. After executing step S21307, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S21305, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 54b is not established (S21305: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 53: S21225).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is set to ON in the RAM 64 as the jackpot flag.

In step S21401, when it is determined that the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402, and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing step S21402, the process advances to step S21403.

In step S21403, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step S21403, the process advances to step S21404.

On the other hand, in step S21401, when it is determined that the jackpot flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, a high-frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and when the determined jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot B and 8R probability variable jackpot B, the high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON, and the determined jackpot type is 8R. In the case of probability variable jackpot A, the high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing step S21404, the process advances to step S21405.

In step S21405, a high-frequency support mode command is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, a high frequency support mode A command or a high frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process.

In step S21406, a process of erasing (turning OFF) the jackpot flag is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 48: S20708).

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step S21501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flags in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the normal electric accessory 53 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when it is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21501 that the supported flag is not ON (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is a flag. If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21502: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

In step S21503, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric service timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 . The count value set in the electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S21503 that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is not "0" (S21503: NO), the electric service support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is "0" (S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

In step S21504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S21504 that it is time to end the variable display (S21504: YES), the flow advances to step S21505 to set off display. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21506 to turn off the electric service processing execution flag. After executing step S21506, the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S21504: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507.

In step S21507, it is determined whether or not the electric service processing in-execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electrician's process in-execution flag is not ON (S21507: NO), the electrician's support process is terminated. In step S21507, when it is determined that the electric service process in-execution flag is ON (S21507: YES), the process proceeds to step S21508.

In step S21508, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S21509 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the high-frequency support mode A flag or the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S21508 (S21508: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S21509 (S21509: YES), the process advances to step S21510 to perform an electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the ball-through processing (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 to 461, the electric accessory is opened. You win the lottery (see FIG. 36(b)). At the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "25" (that is, 0.05 sec). As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, since the variation time in the electric worker opening lottery is 0.05 seconds, the electric worker timer counter Td is set to "25" (that is, 0.05 seconds). 05 sec). The electrical service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S21511.

In step S21511, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21510 is support winning. In step S21511, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S21511: YES), the process proceeds to step S21512 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step S21512, the process advances to step S21513.

In step S21513, processing for setting an electrical opening/closing scenario for high-frequency support mode according to the type of high-frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening and closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A or high-frequency support mode B). is. Specifically, when the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON, an electric opening/closing scenario for high-frequency support mode A is set. In the high-frequency support mode A electric opening and closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric It is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on the condition that three seconds have passed with the accessory 53 open or one game ball enters the second start port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON, the high-frequency support mode B electrical opening/closing scenario is set. In the high-frequency support mode B electric opening and closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode B, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric It is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on the condition that 6 seconds have passed with the accessory 53 open or one game ball enters the second start port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). After executing step S21513, the electric support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21508 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S21508: YES), or if it is determined in step S21509 that the high frequency support mode is not in effect (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21514.

In step S21514, an electric accessory open lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4 moved to the electric accessary product execution area 64e is 0 or 1 in the ball-through processing (FIG. 47: S20604), the electric accessary product is opened. You win the lottery (see FIG. 36(a)). At the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric role timer counter Td is set to "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec). As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the low-frequency support mode, the variation time in the electric worker opening lottery is 10 seconds, so the electric worker timer counter Td is set to "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec). The electrical service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S21515.

In step S21515, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21514 is support winning. In step S21515, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S21515: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21515 that the support win has been made (S21515: YES), the flow advances to step S21516 to turn on the support win flag. After executing step S21516, the process advances to step S21517.

In step S21517, processing for setting an electrical opening/closing scenario for low-frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode electric opening and closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric accessory is set. It is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on the condition that 3 seconds have passed in the open state of 53 or that one game ball enters the second start port 34 (see FIG. 37). After executing step S21517, the electric support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is ON (S21502: YES), the process advances to step S21518 to determine whether or not the value of the electric timer counter Td is "0". In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 . In step S21518, when it is determined that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is not "0" (S21518: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric service supporting process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21518 that the value of the electric service timer counter Td is "0" (S21518: YES), the process proceeds to step S21519.

In step S21519, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21520 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process advances to step S21521 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 53. The details of the electrical opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21521, the process proceeds to step S21522.

In step S21522, it is determined whether the electrical opening/closing process has ended. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electrician opening/closing process has not ended (S21522: NO), the electrician support process is ended. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electrical opening/closing process has ended (S21522: YES), the flow advances to step S21523 to turn off the supporting flag. After that, the process advances to step S21524 to turn off the electric service processing in-execution flag. After executing step S21524, the electric support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electric power opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 56: S21521).

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is open. In step S21601, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21602.

In step S21602, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 53 is opened (once in the present embodiment) when one electric role opening lottery is won is counted, and the closed state of the normal electric accessory 53 is maintained. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state is established by counting with a timer counter whether or not the time has passed and the opening timing has been reached. If it is determined in step S21602 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not established (S21602: NO), the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21602 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (S21602: YES), the process proceeds to step S21603.

In step S21603, the normal electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing step S21603, the process advances to step S21604.

In step S21604, an electric power release command is set. The electric role release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that has received the electric role opening command performs setting for executing the electric role opening effect. After that, the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21601 that the normal electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21605.

In step S21605, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the normal electric accessory 53 is established. Specifically, the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode A is that "three seconds have passed in the open state" or "one game ball is released while the normal electric accessory 53 is open." The ball is entered into the second starting port 34” is established. The condition for closing the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B is that "six seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one game ball has passed through the second starting port 34 while the normal electric accessory 53 is open." It means that either one of the following conditions is established. The condition for closing the normal electric accessory 53 in the low-frequency support mode is that "three seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one game ball has entered the second start port 34 while the normal electric accessory 53 is open." It means that either one of “entering the ball” is established. If it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is not satisfied (S21605: NO), the electrical opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is satisfied (S21605: YES), the process proceeds to step S21606.

In step S21606, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed. After executing step S21606, the process advances to step S21607.

In step S21607, an electrical closing command is set. The electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 48 : step S20703) of the normal process. The audio light-emitting device that has received the power closing command executes settings for executing an effect for closing the power. After that, the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

B6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S21701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S21701, the process advances to step S21702.

In step S21702, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62 . The game state stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage processing will be described later. After executing step S21702, the process advances to step S21703.

In step S21703, support mode effect processing is executed. The support mode effect processing is a process for setting background moving images and sounds to be output in accordance with the type of support mode, in addition to the effect for each game round. The details of the support mode effect processing will be described later. After executing step S21703, the process advances to step S21704.

In step S21704, a game round effect process is executed. The game round effect processing is a process for setting an effect to be executed for each game round. Details of the game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S21704, the process advances to step S21705.

In step S21705, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62 . For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds. After executing step S21705, the process advances to step S21706.

In step S21706, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S21703 to S21705. After executing step S21706, the process advances to step S21707.

In step S21707, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the processes of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S21703 to S21705 is output. After executing step S21707, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be described. The state storage processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21702).

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. The state storage processing is processing for storing the state of the game being executed in the sound emission control device 90 . The state storage process is roughly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps S21801 to S21804 are processing for storing whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed. Steps S21805 to S21808 are processing for storing whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. Steps S21809 to S21818 are processing for storing whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, the high-frequency support mode B, or the low-frequency support mode.

In step S21801, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode ends. If it is determined in step S21801 that the open/close execution mode end command has been received (S21801: YES), the flow advances to step S21802 to turn off the open/close execution mode execution flag. The opening/closing execution mode executing flag is a flag for storing whether the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. is a flag that is set to After executing step S21802, the process advances to step S21803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21801 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (S21801: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21803.

In step S21803, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. The open/close execution mode start command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. If it is determined in step S21803 that the open/close execution mode start command has been received (S21803: YES), the flow advances to step S21804 to turn on the open/close execution mode execution flag. After executing step S21804, the process advances to step S21805.

If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (S21803: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21805.

In step S21805, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode command has been received. The high-probability mode command is a command sent from main controller 60 to sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode ends and the high-probability mode starts. If it is determined in step S21805 that the high-probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step S21806 to turn on the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag. The sound and light side high probability mode flag is a flag for storing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step S21806, the process advances to step S21807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21805 that the high-probability mode command has not been received (S21805: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21807.

In step S21807, it is determined whether or not a low-probability mode command has been received. The low-probability mode command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. If it is determined in step S21807 that the low-probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step S21808 to turn off the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag. After executing step S21808, the process advances to step S21809.

If it is determined in step S21807 that the low-probability mode command has not been received (S21807: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21809.

In step S21809, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high frequency support mode A command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A. FIG. If it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has been received (S21809: YES), the process proceeds to step S21810.

In step S21810, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound and light side high-frequency support mode B flag is turned ON when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode B, and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode B shifts to another support mode. . If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21810: YES), the process advances to step S21811 to turn off the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21812.

If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode B flag is not ON (S21810: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21812.

In step S21812, the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. The sound and light side high-frequency support mode A flag is turned ON when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode A, and is turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode A shifts to another support mode. . After executing step S21812, the process advances to step S21813.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has not been received (S21809: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21813.

In step S21813, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high frequency support mode B command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B. FIG. If it is determined in step S21813 that the high frequency support mode B command has been received (S21813: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

In step S21814, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21814: YES), the process advances to step S21815 to turn off the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21816.

If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21814: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21816.

In step S21816, the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON. After executing step S21816, the process advances to step S21817.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21813 that the high frequency support mode B command has not been received (S21813: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21817.

In step S21817, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support mode command has been received. The low frequency support mode command is a command sent from the main controller 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21817 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S21817: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818.

In step S21818, the ON flag of the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag and the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. After that, the state storage processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21817 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S21817: NO), the state storage processing ends.

<Support mode effect processing>
Next, the support mode effect processing will be described. The support mode effect processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 59: S21703).

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing support mode effect processing. In step S21901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode executing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the open/close execution mode executing flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21901 that the open/close execution mode execution flag is ON (S21901: YES), the support mode effect processing is terminated.

In step S21902, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21902 that neither the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

In step S21903, setting processing of an effect pattern for the low-frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the state of the low-frequency support mode, the video and audio prompting the left-handed player to enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 are displayed separately from the production for each game round (game round production). , to set the content to be output as the background video and background music as a production pattern. After executing step S21903, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21902 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound and light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: YES), the process proceeds to step S21904.

In step S21904, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21904: YES), the process proceeds to step S21905.

In step S21905, the setting processing of the effect pattern for the high-frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high-frequency support mode A, the video and audio prompting the player to hit the left and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 is produced for each game round (game round production). ), this is a process for setting the contents to be output as the background image and the background music as an effect pattern in order to output the background image and the background music. In the state of the high frequency support mode A, compared with the state of the low frequency support mode, the ratio of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is high, and when a big win is won, a more advantageous privilege can be given. Therefore, the performance for the high-frequency support mode A is a performance that gives the player a greater sense of expectation than the performance for the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S21905, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21904: NO), the process proceeds to step S21906.

At step S21906, a process of setting an effect pattern for the high-frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the image and sound prompting the player to hit the right hand and pass the game ball through the through gate 35b are produced for each game round (game round production). Separately, in order to output the background image and the background music, it is a process for setting the content to be output as the background image and the background music as the effect pattern. In the state of the high-frequency support mode B, compared with the state of the high-frequency support mode A, the ratio of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is high, and a more advantageous privilege is given when a big win is won. Since there is a possibility, the effect for the high-frequency support mode B is a effect that gives the player a greater sense of expectation than the effect for the high-frequency support mode A. After executing step S21906, the support mode rendering process is terminated.

<Processing for game round production>
Next, the game cycle effect processing will be described. The game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 59: S21704).

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing processing for game round effect. In step S22001, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22001 that the variation command has been received (S22001: YES), the process proceeds to step S22002.

In step S22002, the command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . Then, it progresses to step S22003.

In step S22003, a production pattern setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern for a game round to be processed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S22003, the process proceeds to step S22004.

In step S22004, the setting process of the pattern for liquid crystals to stop is performed. In the liquid crystal pattern setting process, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the activated line L1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display this time. It is set as the information of the design for use. Also, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, the presence or absence of the occurrence of ready-to-win is determined from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the current liquid crystal pattern information. After executing step S22004, the process proceeds to step S22005.

In step S22005, a game spin effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The game round effect command is information including the effect pattern set in step S22003 and the content of the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped set in step S22004. The display control device 100 that has received the game round effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image for the effect and the image of the liquid crystal pattern based on the information included in the game round command. After executing step S22005, the process advances to step S22006.

In step S22006, a pending information update process is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the pending number counter area is updated so that the pending number stored in the pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S22008, the game round effect processing is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the processing for setting the effect pattern will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect process (FIG. 62: S22003).

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is to be set has won a jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a big win included in the received variation command. In step S22101, when it is determined that the game round to be processed has won a jackpot in the winning lottery (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102.

In step S22102, it is determined whether or not the game round for which the effect is to be set has won a probability variable jackpot in the winning lottery. In step S22102, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is won (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

In step S22103, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is the jackpot B. In step S22103, when it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is jackpot B (S22103: YES), the process proceeds to step S22104.

In step S22104, setting processing of the production pattern for the probability variable jackpot B is executed. When the probability variable jackpot B is won, the game cycle to be executed from the next time is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the variable probability big win B is a big win that is very advantageous for the player, the performance pattern for the variable probability big win B is set to give the player a great sense of expectation. After executing step S22104, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step S22103, when it is determined that there is no jackpot B as the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is won (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105.

In step S22105, the setting process of the production pattern for the probability variable jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22105, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step S22102, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot has not been won (S22102: NO), the process proceeds to step S22106. In step S22106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is the jackpot B. In step S22106, when it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is jackpot B (S22106: YES), the process proceeds to step S22107.

In step S22107, a process of setting an effect pattern for normal jackpot B is executed. After executing step S22107, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step S22106, when it is determined that the jackpot type of the game round in which the jackpot to be processed is not jackpot B (S22106: NO), the process proceeds to step S22108.

In step S22108, the setting processing of the effect pattern for normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22108, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step S22101, when it is determined that the game round to be processed has not won a big win in the winning lottery (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109.

In step S22109, a process for setting an effect pattern for losing is executed. After executing step S22109, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S22201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S22202.

In step S22202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S22301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S22401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 65) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S22401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the pattern for the liquid crystal set by the sound emission control device 90, and generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S22402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S22401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S22403.

In step S22403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S22402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S22404.

In step S22404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S22403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S22405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the game balls entered from the opening 122 are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120 to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, When the distributed game ball enters the first starting port 33a or enters the first starting port 33b, the same pattern (first pattern) is changed, so that the distributed game ball is distributed. Unexpectedness can be imparted to a player who has guessed that a different pattern will change for each ball-entering part (starting hole). In addition, the player can make various guesses about the role (installation purpose) of the sorting mechanism 120 that guides the same pattern to the entrance portion (starting port) that changes the same pattern despite being sorted into two paths. can.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is provided with the normal electric accessory 53 on the path through which the game balls flow from the right flow path R2 to the first start port 33b, the distribution mechanism 120 causes the left flow path R1 and the right flow path In the case where the game balls distributed to any of R2 serve as a trigger to change the same pattern (first pattern), and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are normal electric accessories. 53 may be a trigger to change the second pattern, and even in the same distribution mode in which game balls reach the sorting mechanism 120, the first pattern and the second pattern are changed depending on the type of support mode. The percentage to be given can be made differently. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53, it is possible to change the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol. .

More specifically, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be considered as a sorting mechanism that sorts the game balls flowing out from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b and the second starting port 34, and is used for pachinko in this embodiment. The machine 10 can be considered to have two sorting mechanisms, the sorting mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 . Since the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism operates is the winning probability of the electric role open lottery, it can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even if the game ball that reaches the distribution mechanism 120 is alternately distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, the normal electric accessory 53 functions as a distribution mechanism. changes the probability of distributing the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electric role open lottery), so that the first pattern and the second pattern fluctuate. You can change the ratio. For example, when the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second start port 34 (the winning probability of the electric role open lottery) is set low (in the case of the low frequency support mode), the distribution mechanism 120 left The game ball distributed to the flow path R1 is entered into the first starting port 33a to change the first symbol. Since the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 has a low probability of winning the power opening lottery, it can be entered into the first starting port 33b with a high probability, and the first pattern can be varied. That is, the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 is entered into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) with a high probability, and the first pattern is changed with a high probability (frequency). can be made

On the other hand, when the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second start port 34 (the winning probability of the electric role open lottery) is set high (in the case of high frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 The game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 are entered into the first starting port 33a to change the first pattern. Since the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 has a high probability of winning the power opening lottery, it can be entered into the second starting port 34 with a high probability and the second pattern can be varied. In this way, by changing the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery, it is possible to change the changing ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol even if the distribution mode of the game balls is the same.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a through gate 35b in addition to the through gate 35a arranged inside the distribution mechanism 120 as a through gate that triggers the execution of the electric role opening lottery, the distribution mechanism Even in the mode of circulation of game balls that do not pass through 120, the normal electric accessory 53 can be opened. As a result, in the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball can enter the second start port 34 with a high probability by circulating the game ball in a circulation manner passing through the through gate 35b.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can realize the following. When the game ball is circulated so that the player reaches the distribution mechanism 120 in the low frequency support mode, the game ball enters the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, and enters the second start port. Since the possibility of the game ball entering 34 is low, only the first symbol can be varied with high probability. In the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is circulated so that the player reaches the distribution mechanism 120, there is a high possibility that the game ball enters the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. Therefore, the first pattern and the second pattern can be varied. In the high-frequency support mode B, when the player circulates the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, there is a high possibility that the game ball enters only the second start port 34, so there is a high probability that the game ball will enter. Only 2 symbols can be varied. As a result, there are at least three game states: a game state in which only the first symbol varies with high probability, a game state in which both the first symbol and the second symbol vary, and a game state in which only the second symbol varies with high probability. state can be created.

In other words, when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of game balls to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) per unit time The relative ratio between the number of balls entering and the number of balls entering the second starting port 34 can be controlled to be changeable in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three stages of relative ball entry ratios (game states), it is possible to create a variety of new game flows and improve the interest in the game.

As explained in the above game flow, here, the effects of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be explained by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. First, when a winning lottery (including a jackpot winning and a small winning winning if a small winning winning is set) is won in a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole. The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to is the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port as a trigger (jackpot winning, And, if a small winning is set, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given in the case of winning is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the benefits given when winning in the normal time is the expected value of the benefits in the normal time, and the expected value of the benefits given in the case of winning in the high-frequency support mode is the expected value of benefits in the high support mode. and

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "conventional pachinko machine") having a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional pachinko machine, in the initial normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when the game is started, game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first start port and the second start port are distributed. A game ball is put into the mouth alternately. When the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at high frequency, so that the game ball enters the second start port with high probability without going through the sorting means. Let

In a conventional pachinko machine, if the expected value of benefits at high support is higher than the expected value of benefits at normal time and the difference is to be increased, in order to increase the expected value of benefits at high support, second It is necessary to increase the expected value of the privilege, but if the expected value of the second privilege is increased, the expected value of the privilege at normal times will also increase (in the normal state, the game ball enters the first start port and the second start port). Because the lottery is executed by hitting the ball). In addition, even if the first expected privilege value is reduced, the expected privilege value in normal times is the average of the expected first privilege value and the expected second privilege value. It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, if the expected privilege value at normal time is relatively large, the expected privilege value at high support time is adjusted to within the range of the regulation. should be reduced. In other words, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected value of the privilege at normal time and the expected value of privilege at high support. In other words, it is not possible to provide a wide swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state among the game states other than the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, when the normal state (normal game state, state with the lowest expected value of benefits) shifts to the high-frequency support mode (the best game state, state with the highest expected value of benefits), the player's expectations are increased. cannot be triggered.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment circulates game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in a normal state, but the game balls enter only the first start hole 33a with a high probability. By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, when the player hits to the right, the game ball enters only the second start hole 34 with a high probability, so the second privilege expected value should be set high. Thus, the expected value of the high-support privilege in the high-frequency support B can be increased. That is, among game states other than the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide a wide swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state. Furthermore, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34, The expected value of benefits at high support (during high-frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected value of benefits at normal time and the expected value of benefits at high support (during high-frequency support mode B), normal state → high-frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game from mode A to high frequency support mode B, the value of the privilege expected value to be granted gradually increases, and the normal game state excluding the opening and closing execution mode It is possible to provide a large swing in the profit that the player can obtain between the game state and the best game state.

Furthermore, if there are restrictions on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be reduced by setting the expected value of the first benefit low. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is increased. That is, among game states excluding the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to provide per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profit that the player can obtain between the normal game state and the best game state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special benefits within the limits of the regulation.

In addition, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects of the features are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first start port and the second start port. As explained above, this effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines illustrated above, but is also effective for pachinko machines equipped with two or more ball-entering sections that trigger different types of lotteries to be executed. to achieve its effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the through gate 35a, through which the passage of the game ball triggers the execution of the electric power opening lottery, is arranged in one route (right flow path R2) distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls (the order in which the game balls are distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2), and to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, when the player is sorted to the right flow path R2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player wins the electric power opening lottery. Therefore, at least two levels of expectations are given, namely, the mode of distributing the game balls in the distributing mechanism 120 and the lottery result in the electric role opening lottery (that is, whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is opened). can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a low-frequency support mode as a support mode, and although the winning probability of the electric role open lottery is higher than the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the electric role open lottery and the normal High frequency support mode A in which the opening time of the electric accessory 53 is the same as the low frequency support mode, and the winning probability of the electric role open lottery is higher than the low frequency support mode, and the fluctuation time in the electric role open lottery (normal pattern high-frequency support mode B in which the fluctuation time of the electric accessory 53 is short and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is long. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has the following effects.
First, define as follows.
The lottery time of the electric role open lottery in the high-frequency support mode A (fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is Tp, and when the electric role open lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 starts the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time ends. Tm is the time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface until it becomes possible to assist. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts1, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr1, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to reach the normal electric accessory 53. Tf1 is the time from when the ball is reached to when the ball is entered into the second starting hole 34 by the normal electric accessory 53 opened.
The lottery time of the electric role open lottery (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the high frequency support mode B is Tp, and when the electric role open lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 starts the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time ends. Tm is the time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface until it becomes possible to assist. Ts2 is the opening time of the electric accessory 53, Tr2 is the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, and Tr2 is the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and the normal electric accessory 53. Tf2 is the time from when the ball is reached to when the ball is entered into the second starting hole 34 by the normal electric accessory 53 that has been opened.
When defined in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to satisfy the following equations (1) to (3).
Tp+Tm≦Tr1... Formula (1)
Tp+Tm≦Tr2...Equation (2)
Tr1+Tf1≤Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≤Tp+Tm+Ts2... Formula (3)
In this embodiment, specific values of the above parameters are Tp=0.05 seconds, Tm=0.1 seconds, Tr1=0.3 seconds, Tr2=0.3 seconds, Tf1=2. .0 seconds, Tf2=5.0 seconds, Ts1=3.0 seconds, and Ts2=6.0 seconds, satisfying the above equations (1) to (3).

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35a, guidance by the normal electric accessory 53 ( The game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by assisting), but when the game ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the game ball is the second starting port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 is closed before entering the ball, the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加
Therefore, considering the distribution mode of the game balls that are advantageous for the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls are played so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution mode (left hitting) in which the balls are distributed is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode (right hitting) in which the game balls pass through the through gate 35b.

On the other hand, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, when the through gate 35a is circulated so that the game ball passes, and when the through gate 35b is circulated so that the game ball passes In either case, the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by guidance (assistance) by the normal electric accessory 53 . However, when the through gate 35a is circulated so that the game ball passes through, the game ball passes through the distribution mechanism 120, so among the game balls reaching the distribution mechanism 120, the game distributed to the right flow path R2 Only balls can pass through the through gate 35a. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the number of game balls that reach the distribution mechanism 120 passes through the through gate 35a and enters the second start port 34. The ratio of the number of game balls that pass through the through gate 35b to the number of game balls that reach the through gate 35b when the game balls are distributed (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b is the second It is lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting port 34. - 特許庁Therefore, considering the distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous to the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed) in which the game balls circulate so as to pass through the through gate 35b. This is a distribution mode of game balls that is more advantageous to the player than the distribution mode (left-handed hitting) in which game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the sorting mechanism 120).

Here, the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B differ only in the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when winning one electric role opening lottery as control during the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can play an advantageous game for the player simply by switching between the two high-frequency support modes with different opening times of the normal electric accessory 53 when one electric role opening lottery is won. It is possible to change the distribution mode of the balls. Therefore, it is possible to create a new playability, and furthermore, it is possible to make the player actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game balls, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

B7. Modified example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

B7-1. Variant 1:
In the second embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 is arranged above the first start port 33b, in the high-frequency support mode B, the normal electric accessory 53 While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down and enters the first starting port 33b. There is a problem that the ball will be hit. Modification 1 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 67, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is shown in the closed state when indicated by broken lines, and in the open state when indicated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the second starting port 34 in this example is arranged on the right side of the game board 30 from the first starting port 33b in front view. In addition, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes two movable pieces, a left movable piece 53d and a right movable piece 53e. The left movable piece 53d is arranged on the game ball circulation path from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b. The left movable piece 53d is slanted so that the right side portion is positioned lower than the left side portion. The right movable piece 53e is arranged on the distribution path of the game balls passing through the through gate 35b. The right movable piece 53e is slanted such that the left portion is positioned lower than the right portion.

The rest of the configuration and control details such as the winning probability of the electric role open lottery in each support mode, the fluctuation time in the electric role open lottery, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53, etc. are the same as in the above embodiment. Each support mode when adopting such a configuration will be described below.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. During execution of the low-frequency support mode, similarly to the above-described embodiment, game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, and the left flow A game ball distributed to the path R1 enters the first starting port 33a (FIG. 67(a)), and a game ball distributed to the right channel R2 enters the first starting port 33b (FIG. 67). (b)).

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in Modification 1. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, similarly to the above-described embodiment, game balls entering the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 68(a), the game ball swung into the left flow path R1 enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 68(b), the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 is guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the open normal electric accessory 53 with a high probability to the second starting port. Enter 34. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in Modification 1. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35b by striking to the right. During execution of the high-frequency support mode B, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open normal electric accessory 53 with a high probability. The ball enters the second starting port 34 by pressing.

At this time, unlike the second embodiment, the part (right movable piece 53e) of the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b. Since it is not arranged above, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first start port 33b and the second start port It can reach up to 34. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowed down. can be suppressed from entering the first starting hole 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the modified example 1 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting port 34 as compared with the above-described embodiment.

B7-2. Modification 2:
In the second embodiment, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 is arranged above the first start port 33b. While guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball that is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down is the first start port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowed down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 70 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 2. As shown in FIG.

Modification 2 differs from Modification 1 above in that Modification 2 does not include the first starting port 33b that Modification 1 has. Other configurations are the same as those of the first modification.

70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 2, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode A in Modification 2, and FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining frequency support mode B;

In the case of modification 2, as shown in FIG. 71(b), in the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 are guided by the left movable piece 53d to perform the second starting. The ball enters the mouth 34. At this time, unlike the configuration of the modified example 1, the modified example 2 does not have the first starting port 33b. Even when the game ball is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down, it is possible to avoid the game ball from entering the first start port 33b. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

Also, unlike the second embodiment, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the part of the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable Piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b, and the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper portion. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowed down. can be avoided from entering the first starting hole 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the modified example 2 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting port 34 as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-3. Variant 3:
In the second embodiment, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 is arranged above the first start port 33b. While guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball that is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down is the first start port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowed down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

In addition, in the above modification 1 and modification 2, the normal electric accessory 53 has two parts, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e. There is a problem that a wide (large) space for arranging the object 53 must be secured. Modification 3 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 3. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 does not have the first starting port 33b as in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. Also, the second starting port 34 is arranged on the distribution path along which the game balls released from the opening 124 flow down. Furthermore, an ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged on the game ball circulation path from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34 . The operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this modification differs from that in the above embodiment. The normal electric accessory 53 in Modification 3 is opened and closed by moving the movable piece 53a arranged so as to protrude from the game board 30 on the plane of the game board 30 . FIG. 73 shows the state of the low-frequency support mode, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 73(b) is closed.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 73(b), during execution of the low-frequency support mode, a game ball entering the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. The game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 flow out from the opening 124 and then close. It flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the normal electric accessory 53 in the state, does not enter the second starting port 34, and further flows downward from the normal electric accessory 53.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in Modification 3. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls entering the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. FIG. 74(a) shows how a game ball swung into the left flow path R1 enters the first starting port 33a. FIG. 74(b) shows how a game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 enters the second starting port 34. FIG. As shown in FIG. 74(b), the normal electric accessory 53 in this example shifts from the closed state to the open state by moving in the upper right direction when viewing the game board 30 from the front. When the normal electric accessory 53 moves in the upper right direction, the game ball can flow from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加In addition, since the normal electric accessory 53 in the above-described embodiment and modification guides the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 53 to the second start port 34, the game ball enters the second start port 34. Although it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the ball, the normal electric accessory 53 in this example also makes it easy for the game ball released from the opening 124 to enter the second start hole 34 by shifting to the open state. , it functions as auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 .

In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in Modification 3. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35b by striking to the right. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of the wall portion W of the game board 30, circulates on the upper surface of the wall portion W, and then reaches the upper surface of the open ordinary electric accessory 53. , and enters the second starting port 34 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 does not have the first starting port 33b, as in Modification 2, so that the normal electric accessory 53 is opened at an unintended timing in the high-frequency support mode A state. Even if it shifts from 1 to the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first start port 33b.

In addition, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B may be positioned above the first starting port 33b. However, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 in the high-frequency support mode B can reach the second starting port 34 without passing over the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowed down. can be avoided from entering the first starting hole 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the modified example 3 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting port 34 as compared with the second embodiment.

Further, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in Modification 3 does not have two parts, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, unlike the above Modifications 1 and 2, and is composed of one movable piece. . Therefore, the space in which the normal electric accessory 53 is arranged can be narrowed (reduced) with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30, and the space saving of the arrangement area of the normal electric accessory 53 can be realized.

In addition, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in Modification 3 shields the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 when in the closed state, and the flow from the wall portion W to the second start port 34 is blocked. Disconnect the route. In the open state, the shielding of the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 is released, and the flow path from the wall portion W to the second start port 34 is formed. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can change the two distribution channels by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can simultaneously change the states of two types of distribution channels by one state change. As a result, when the game ball is circulated in the distribution route from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34, and when the game ball is circulated in the distribution route from the wall portion W to the second start port 34, either Also in this case, a game using the normal electric accessory 53 can be executed.

B7-4. Variant 4:
In the second embodiment, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 is arranged above the first start port 33b. While guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball that is released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flows down is the first start port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the normal electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowed down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

In addition, in the configurations of Modifications 2 and 3, game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low-frequency support mode enter the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. It was configured to flow down as it is without balling. As a result, there is a problem that the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out without depending on the action of the role to the total number of prize balls paid out in a series of games becomes low. Modification 4 described below solves the above problem.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 4. As shown in FIG. FIG. 76 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 2. As shown in FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of Modified Example 4, a general prize winning port 32 is arranged on a distribution path along which game balls released from the opening 124 flow down. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 4 does not have the first starting port 33b.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the low-frequency support mode, a game ball entered from the opening 122 and distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enters the first start port 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the general winning hole 32. Then, as shown in FIG. In the configurations of Modifications 2 and 3, game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low-frequency support mode are not allowed to enter the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. However, in this modified example, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 enter the general winning hole 32 in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, compared with the second and third modifications, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out regardless of the action of the role to the total number of prize balls paid out in a series of games.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in Modification 4. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first start port 33a. Then, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 enters the second starting port 34. - 特許庁In the configuration of Modified Example 4, even if the normal electric accessory 53 is closed while the left movable piece 53d guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 32. It is possible to avoid unintentionally entering the first starting hole 33b by entering the ball. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in Modification 4. FIG. As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, similarly to the modification 1, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b has a high probability of moving the open normal electric accessory 53 to the right side. Guided (assisted) by the piece 53e, the ball enters the second starting hole . Unlike the second embodiment, the configuration of Modification 4 does not include the first start port 33b. The game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B without the part of 53 (right movable piece 53e) being positioned above the first start port 33b is It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing over the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowed down. can be avoided from entering the first starting hole 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the modified example 2 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting port 34 as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-5. Variant 5:
In the second embodiment, since the first starting port 33 is provided with two of the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, the detection of the entering ball of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 33 is It is necessary to perform at the two ball entry portions of the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b. There is a problem that the space for arranging the starting port must be secured wider (larger) than before. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B is arranged above the first start port 33b. The game ball guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B reaches the second start port 34 through the upper portion of the first start port 33b. At this time, if the normal electric accessory 53 is closed while the normal electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the game ball released from the normal electric accessory 53 and flowing down is There is a problem that the ball is unintentionally entered into the first starting hole 33b. Modification 5 shown below solves the above problem.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 5. As shown in FIG. 79 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the distribution mechanism 120 in Modification 5, the left flow path R1 forms a semicircular shape. In addition, both the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 and released from the opening 123 and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 are placed in positions where they can enter. A starting port 33a is arranged. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of the modification 5 does not have the first starting port 33b.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), during execution of the low-frequency support mode, game balls entered into the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. , and the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 also flow out from the opening 124, 1 The ball enters the starting hole 33a.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode A in Modification 5. In FIG. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls entering the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game ball swung into the left flow path R1 enters the first starting hole 33a. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the open normal electric accessory 53 with a high probability to the second starting port. Enter 34. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in modification 5. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35b by striking to the right. During execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) by the right movable piece 53e of the open normal electric accessory 53 with a high probability to the second start port 34. enter the ball.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in Modification 5 is provided with only one of the first start openings 33a as the first start openings, compared with the second embodiment, there is a sensor for detecting the entry of game balls that must be provided. can reduce the number of In addition, along with this, the processing required for ball-entering detection can also be reduced. Furthermore, the space that must be secured for arranging the starting port with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than in the second embodiment.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the part (right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33 Since it is not arranged above (the first start port 33a), the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B moves the upper part of the first start port 33 It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowed down. can be suppressed from entering the first starting hole 33 . Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, the modified example 5 can further increase the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the second starting port 34 as compared with the above-described embodiment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 , both enter the same first starting hole 33a, which is the same ball entering portion, so that the player can make various guesses about the purpose of installing the sorting mechanism 120, and can be given unexpectedness.

B7-6. Modification 6:
Since the distribution mechanism 120 in the second embodiment and the modified example alternately distributes the game balls that have reached the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, the player can see that the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 There is a problem that it is possible to guess how the game will be distributed, and that the player's concentration and attention to the game may decrease. Modification 6 described below solves the above problem.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the sorting mechanism 120, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 6. As shown in FIG. FIG. 82 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in Modification 6. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 82, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is shown in the closed state when indicated by broken lines, and in the open state when indicated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 82 , the distribution mechanism 120 in Modification 6 includes a crew 129 that temporarily retains the game ball entered from the opening 122 . The croon 129 is formed with an opening 123 and an opening 124 . A through gate 35 a is provided in the opening 124 .

A game ball entered from the opening 122 is released from the opening 123 or 124 after temporarily remaining while moving within the region of the croon 129 . That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in this modification randomly distributes the reached game balls to the opening 123 and the opening 124 .

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. As shown in FIG. 82(a), the game ball distributed to the opening 123 in the croon 129 enters the first starting port 33a. Also, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the crun 129 pass through the through gate 35a. With the passing as a trigger, an electrical opening lottery is executed, but since it is a low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery is low, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 have a high probability of entering the first start port 33b. enter the ball.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in Modification 6. FIG. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 by striking left. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the game ball distributed to the opening 123 in the croon 129 enters the first starting port 33a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the crun 129 pass through the through gate 35a, and with the passing as a trigger, the electric role opening lottery is executed. Since it is the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in that case, the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the opening 124 by the crew 129 is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53, and enters the second start port 34 with a high probability. In addition, in this modification, even if the player hits to the right during execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Since the normal electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching , the game ball does not enter the second start port 34 .

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining high-frequency support mode B in Modification 6. FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open normal electric accessory 53 with a high probability. The ball enters the second starting port 34 by pressing.

Thus, the modification 6 is provided with the crew 129 unlike the said embodiment and modification in the structure of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. That is, the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are not alternately distributed to two paths, but randomly distributed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the sorting mode in the sorting mechanism 120, and the player can concentrate on the game. In particular, in the case of the high-frequency support mode A, game balls distributed to the opening 123 enter the first starting port 33a, and game balls distributed to the opening 124 enter the second starting port 34 with a high probability. enter the ball. Therefore, unlike the case where the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the two paths, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33a and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 Bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of Modified Example 6, in the high-frequency support A, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

In addition, in this modification, the configuration in which two openings, the opening 123 and the opening 124, are formed in the rune 129 is adopted, but the configuration in which three or more openings are formed in the rune 129 may be adopted. For example, a configuration in which the cloon 129 includes a third opening in addition to the openings 123 and 124 may be adopted. A configuration in which the general prize winning port 32 is provided on the distribution path of the game balls released from the third opening, or a configuration in which the ball entry portion is not provided may be adopted. By doing so, it becomes even more difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the sorting mode in the sorting mechanism 120 .

B7-7. Variant 7:
The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described embodiment adopts a configuration in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode when the probability variable jackpot is won, and the high probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won, but the high probability mode is used. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times the game is executed is limited. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is triggered by winning the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode Since the number of games that can be executed in the state of B is limited (for example, 150 times), if the jackpot is not won before reaching the limited number of times, the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are set. Therefore, in the state of the high probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 7 gives the player a sense of anticipation of winning a big win, and is disadvantageous when the big win is not won within the limited number of times. It is also possible to give a sense of danger that the game will shift to a dangerous state, and it is possible to give an intonation to the player's expectation.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first start port, when the jackpot type (probable variable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that is the high-frequency support mode A is won, the jackpot It is also possible to employ a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the prize has been won. For example, a mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won in the performance of the game round when the jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode A.例文帳に追加Then, the period of the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round in which the player wins the jackpot is set to a very short period so that the player hardly recognizes that the opening/closing execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (number of rounds) set for the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) to be high frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, 2 rounds), and the round game Set the time to be very short. Furthermore, the presentation during the opening/closing execution mode is also set in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to recognize it. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the state of the low-frequency support mode has shifted to the high-frequency support A after winning the jackpot. As a result, while the player does not notice, the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately entering the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b (low frequency support mode). To impart unexpectedness to a player by shifting to a state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the game ball reaching the minute mechanism 120 alternately enters the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls that have passed through the through gates 35 (through gates 35a and 35b) are not retained, but a configuration in which game balls that have passed through are retained may be adopted ( The maximum number of holds is 4). By doing so, in the case of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). A phenomenon that the timing to open the normal electric accessory 53 and the timing to open the normal electric accessory 53 are likely to be deviated, and whether the game ball reaches the second start port 34 by being guided by the normal electric accessory 53 when the timing matches. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not there is a problem, and to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

B7-10. Modification 10:
The ordinary electric accessory 53 is not limited to the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications, and other configurations can be adopted. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the normal electric accessory 53 is in the closed state, the game ball circulation surface 53s of the plate-like movable piece 53a falls in parallel with the plane of the game board 30. When the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state, the circulation surface 53s rotates so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and a game ball can circulate on the circulation surface 53s. Even if such a configuration is employed, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment and modification can be obtained.

B7-11. Modification 11:
In the second embodiment, instead of the normal electric accessory 53, a non-electric accessory may be provided. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the non-electric accessory mechanically interlocked with the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is in an open state for a predetermined period of time. Close after the time has passed. By doing so, the processing can be simplified, and the same effects as those of the second embodiment can be obtained.

C. Applies to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 6, 8, and 10 to 12 thereof.

[Feature A1]
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
A rod-shaped member (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the circulation of game balls;
A reference part (first The third edge 333, the fourth edge 334, the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, and the mark 1051) at the entrance 33a of the first starting port 33,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

A stick-shaped member such as a nail that changes the distribution of game balls, for example, may be tilted differently from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. . According to the feature A1, the inclination of the reference portion is predetermined so as to match the inclination of the rod-shaped member intended by the manufacturer. The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be confirmed and corrected so that the rod-shaped member becomes parallel to the reference portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily correct the deviation of the inclination of the rod-shaped member without requiring extensive experience in adjusting the rod-shaped member or a special tool for adjustment.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A ball entrance member (first starting hole 33) that forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter
with
The rod-shaped member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the entrance member,
The gaming machine, wherein the reference portion is provided on the ball entrance member.

According to feature A2, the tilt of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion provided on the entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily correct the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A2,
A gaming machine, wherein the reference part is a rim (third rim 333, fourth rim 334) of the ball entrance (ball entrance 33a).

According to the feature A3, since it is possible to repair the inclination of the nail without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference part in the entrance member, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the game machine from becoming complicated. can be done.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A2,
The gaming machine, wherein the reference part is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the ball entrance member.

According to feature A4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily improved, and the certainty of repair can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 6, 8, 10 to 12 thereof.

[Feature B1]
A gaming machine,
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board for changing the circulation of game balls;
Prescribing means different from the nail for prescribing the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the game machine (the third edge 333 at the ball entrance 33a of the first starting hole 33, the fourth rim 334, upper surface 633S of first starting port 633, first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transport. According to feature B1, since the regulating means regulates the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the game machine, the angle defined by the regulating means is obtained by relying on the regulating means. By confirming and correcting the inclination of the nail, the inclination of the nail can be restored to the condition at the time of shipment. For this reason, deviations in nail inclination can be easily corrected without extensive experience in nail adjustment and without the need for a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A ball entrance member (first starting hole 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
with
A gaming machine, wherein the regulating means is provided in the ball entrance member.

According to feature B2, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the nail by relying on the regulating means provided on the entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily correct the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
A gaming machine, wherein the regulating means is a rim (third rim 333, fourth rim 334) of the ball entrance (ball entrance 33a).

According to the feature B3, since it is possible to repair the inclination of the nail without separately providing a dedicated member as the regulating means, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the game machine from becoming complicated.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
A gaming machine, wherein the defining means is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the ball entrance member.

According to feature B4, it is possible to easily enhance the visibility of the regulating means, and to enhance the certainty of repair.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 9 of the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board for changing the circulation of game balls;
angle information indicating means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about the angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transport. According to feature C1, the angle information indicating means indicates information about the angle that matches the degree of inclination of the nail intended by the manufacturer, so that the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information indicating means. can do. For this reason, deviations in nail inclination can be easily corrected without extensive experience in nail adjustment and without the need for a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
A ball entrance member (first starting hole 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
with
A game machine, wherein the angle information indicating means is provided in the ball entrance member.

According to feature C2, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the nail by relying on the angle information indicating means provided on the entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily correct the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C2,
As the nails, a first nail provided on one side in a predetermined direction and a second nail provided on the other side in the predetermined direction;
with
The entrance member is
Consists of at least a first part and a second part,
The first part is provided with first angle information indicating means for indicating the angle information about the first nail,
A gaming machine, wherein the second part is provided with second angle information indicating means for indicating information about the angle of the second nail.

According to the feature C3, since the entrance member is composed of at least the first part and the second part, the first part is provided with the first angle information clarifying means and the second part is provided with the first angle information clarifying means at the time of manufacturing. It is possible to easily provide the second angle information indicating means. In particular, the first angle information clarifying means and the second angle information clarifying means are oriented in the same direction so that both the first angle information clarifying means and the second angle information clarifying means can be seen from one side. , one of the angle information indicating means will be inside the entrance member, so it is difficult to provide the angle information indicating means inside that at the time of manufacture. Since the mouth member is composed of the first part and the second part, it is easy to manufacture.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 5 of the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board for changing the circulation of game balls;
Marks that define the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board (the third edge 333, the fourth edge 334, the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 at the ball entrance 33a of the first starting port 33) , first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transport. According to feature D1, since the mark defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, the tilt of the nail is confirmed and corrected so that the angle defined by the mark can be obtained by relying on the mark. This allows the nail to be straightened to the angle intended by the manufacturer. For this reason, deviations in nail inclination can be easily corrected without extensive experience in nail adjustment and without the need for a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
A gaming machine, wherein the mark defines the angle of the nail when the gaming machine is shipped.

According to feature D2, the degree of inclination of the nail can be easily restored to the state at the time of shipment of the game machine.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A ball entrance member (first starting hole 33) that is provided below the nail and forms a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
with
The gaming machine, wherein the mark is provided on the ball entrance member.

According to feature D3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the mark provided on the entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily correct the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the entrance member.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
When viewed from a predetermined direction (viewed from the upper side to the lower side), the mark is parallel to the nail, and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail. game machine.

According to feature D4, by checking whether the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from a predetermined direction, it is possible to recognize whether the degree of inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer. Moreover, since at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail when viewed from a predetermined direction, the visibility of the mark is high. Therefore, according to the feature D4, the inclination of the nail can be easily recognized, and the deviation of the inclination of the nail can be repaired more easily.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from modifications 10 to 12 of the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board for changing the circulation of game balls;
A ball entrance (opening 1400) into which a game ball can enter,
A movable part (movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) which is provided at the ball entrance and can be switched between a closed state and an open state in order to change the ease with which a ball enters the ball entrance. Movable means (electric accessories 1410, 1510) comprising
A gaming machine comprising
The movable part is
A gaming machine comprising predetermined portions (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) defining an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board.

The degree of inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of game balls may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transport. According to feature E1, since the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is determined by relying on the predetermined portion so as to form the angle defined by the predetermined portion. By confirming and correcting , the nail can be corrected to the degree of inclination intended by the manufacturer. For this reason, deviations in nail inclination can be easily corrected without extensive experience in nail adjustment and without the need for a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined portion defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the game machine.

According to the feature E2, the nail can be easily restored to the degree of inclination at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
A gaming machine, wherein in the movable means, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle when the movable portion is in the closed state.

According to the feature E3, it is possible to confirm and repair the inclination of the nail so that the angle defined by the predetermined portion is obtained by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
A gaming machine, wherein in the movable means, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle when the movable portion is in the open state.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to confirm and repair the inclination of the nail by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the open state. In particular, a nail close to the position of the movable part in the open state can be targeted for repair, and the nail can be repaired easily.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 7 of the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
a game board forming a game area in which game balls circulate;
A reference part (first mark 1151, second mark 1152) provided on the game board, which is guaranteed to be installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In a game machine, accessories such as nails are placed on the game board. According to feature D1, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the accessory by relying on the reference portion that is guaranteed to be at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to easily and accurately correct the deviation of the inclination of the accessory without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the inclination of the accessory or a special tool for adjustment.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
Nails (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board to change the circulation of game balls
with
A game machine, wherein the angle guaranteed by the reference part is a right angle.

According to the feature F2, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the nail by relying on the reference portion which is guaranteed to be installed perpendicular to the surface of the game board. The nail is installed at the inclination intended by the manufacturer, but according to feature D2, the inclination of the nail can be easily determined by comparing the direction of the nail with the reference part that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. can be verified. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the inclination of the nail.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Type 1 ball entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
Type 2 ball entry means (second starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers the variation of the second symbol;
The number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the number of game balls entering the second type ball entering means per unit time when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player. a control means for controlling the relative ratio of incoming balls to the number of incoming balls so that it can be changed in at least three stages;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means per unit time Since the relative ratio of the number of game balls entering the game ball and the number of entering balls is controlled to be changeable in at least three stages, by combining the three stages of the relative ratio of entering balls, it is possible to create various new game flows. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Assisting means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the game ball entering the second type ball entering means when the predetermined lottery is won;
with
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
A lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is divided into at least two stages of a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. is modifiable and
The assistance time, which is the time during which the assistance means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is defined as a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. changeable in at least two stages,
As control modes, a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time,
A gaming machine, wherein the relative ratio of entering balls is changed by switching the control mode.

According to feature G2, the control means changes the relative ratio of incoming balls by switching between three control modes having different odds of winning a predetermined lottery, lottery execution time, and assistance time, so that relatively simple control is possible. can realize switching of the relative entrance ball ratio.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Type 1 ball entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
Type 2 ball entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which entry of a game ball triggers variation of the second symbol;
Distributing means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately distributing arriving game balls to the first path (left flow path R1) and the second path (right flow path R2);
a first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position, which is a predetermined position on the second path;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball;
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for guiding the arriving game ball in a predetermined distribution direction when the predetermined lottery is won;
with
The first type ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the first path can enter,
The auxiliary means is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the second path can reach,
A gaming machine, wherein the second type ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball guided in a distribution direction by the auxiliary means can enter.

According to feature H1, among the game balls that have reached the distribution means, the game balls that have been distributed to the first path enter the first type ball entering means, and the number of game balls that have been distributed to the second path Among them, the game ball assisted by the assisting means enters the second type ball entering means. Therefore, when the game balls are circulated in such a manner as to reach the sorting means, by changing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the frequency of the game balls entering the type 1 ball entering means is reduced to a predetermined frequency. It is possible to change the frequency of game balls entering the second type ball entering means while keeping it constant within the range.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) that detects passing through a second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position,
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the second detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
A game machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the second detection position can reach.

According to the feature H2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only by the second type entering ball means You can enter the ball. Therefore, by changing the distribution mode, it is possible to change the frequency of ball entry into the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33a in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a pattern change;
A second ball entry means (first starting port 33b in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a pattern change;
Distributing means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths,
a first guide path (left flow path R1) for guiding the distributed game balls to the first ball entering means;
a second guide path (right flow path R2) for guiding the distributed game balls to the second ball entering means;
with
The symbol that changes when a game ball enters the first ball-entering means and the symbol that changes when a game ball enters the second ball-entering means are the same. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature I1, even if the game ball is sorted by the sorting means and the sorted game ball enters the first ball entering means, it enters the second ball entering means. Even when the ball is thrown, the same pattern is changed in each case, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the player who has guessed that different patterns will be changed for each ball-entering means, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
A first symbol variation means for varying a first symbol when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third ball entry means (second starting port 34) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a pattern change;
A second symbol variation means for varying a second symbol, which is a symbol different from the first symbol, when the gaming ball enters the third ball entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic I2, since the third ball entry means is provided, which triggers the variation of the second symbol when the game ball enters, the player is expected to change the first symbol. , a sense of anticipation regarding the variation of the second symbol can be given. Further, the player can make various guesses about the role of the sorting means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I2,
Auxiliary means arranged on a path through which game balls circulate from the sorting means to the second ball entering means, and assisting the game balls circulating on the path to enter the third ball entering means. (Normal electric accessory 53).

According to the feature I3, since the auxiliary means for assisting the ball entering the third ball entering means is provided on the path through which the game ball circulates to the second ball entering means, the game balls sorted by the sorting means are provided. However, if the same pattern (first pattern) is changed regardless of whether it is distributed to the first guide route or the second guide route, and if the game ball distributed to the second guide route is used by the auxiliary means It may be a trigger to change the second pattern, and the ratio of changing the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed according to the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to feature I3,
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second guide route,
The auxiliary means is
Triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, the game ball circulating on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entry means enters the third ball entry means. A game machine characterized by assisting

According to feature I4, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means detects that the game ball circulating on the path through which the game ball circulates from the distribution means to the second ball entry means is the third Since the ball is assisted to enter the ball entering means, the player is urged to circulate the game ball through the second guide path, and when the game ball passes through a predetermined position, the player feels a sense of anticipation. can be given. Further, by urging the player to circulate the game ball through the second guide path, the player can concentrate on the game.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to feature I4,
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball circulating on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means is assisted to enter the third ball entering means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature I5, when the auxiliary means wins a predetermined lottery executed when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means moves on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entering means. To control the ratio of changing the first pattern and the second pattern by controlling the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery since the game balls in circulation are assisted to enter the third ball entry means. can be done.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5,
When the first detection means (thru gate 35a) is used as the detection means for detecting that a predetermined position on the second guide route has been passed,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) different from the first detection means for detecting passage of a specific position different from the position on the route distributed by the distribution means,
The auxiliary means is
Triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, assisting the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature I6, the auxiliary means is triggered by the second detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means enters the third ball entering means. Since the ball is assisted, it is possible to make the game ball enter the third ball entering means through the second detecting means without passing through the sorting means. As a result, it is possible to create a game state in which a game ball can enter only the third ball entering means with a high probability.

[Feature I7]
The gaming machine according to feature I6,
The lottery executing means
Triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, the predetermined lottery is executed,
The auxiliary means is
A game machine that assists the game ball whose passing is detected by the second detecting means to enter the third ball entering means when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to feature I7, when the auxiliary means wins a predetermined lottery executed when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the passage is detected by the second detection means. Since the game ball is assisted to enter the third ball entering means, the game ball is allowed to enter the third ball entering means via the second detection means without passing through the sorting means. becomes possible. Therefore, when the probability of winning the predetermined lottery is lowered and the game ball is distributed so that the player reaches the sorting means, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are used. Since there is a low possibility that a game ball will enter the third ball entering means and a game ball will enter the third ball entering means, only the first symbol can be changed with a high probability. In addition, when the winning probability of a predetermined lottery is increased and game balls are circulated so that the player reaches the sorting means, the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means, and A game ball enters the third ball entering means, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed. Furthermore, after increasing the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, when the player circulates the game ball so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the game ball reaches the sorting means. Since the probability is low and the probability that the game ball enters the third ball entering means via the second detection means and the auxiliary means is high, only the second symbol can be changed with a high probability. Therefore, there are at least three states: a game state in which only the first symbol varies with high probability, a game state in which both the first symbol and the second symbol vary, and a game state in which only the second symbol varies with high probability. can be created. As a result, by variously combining three game states in which the two symbols change in different ratios, new game features can be created.

[Feature I8]
The gaming machine according to feature I6,
A control means for controlling the game machine,
The control means is capable of executing a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
In the second control mode,
The game ball whose passing is detected by the first detection means can or easily enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means;
In the third control mode,
The game ball whose passing is detected by the first detection means can or easily enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
A gaming machine, wherein a game ball whose passing is detected by the second detecting means can or easily enter the third ball entering means with the assistance of the assisting means.

According to feature I8, the control means can execute three control modes with different degrees of difficulty (difficulty/easiness) of entering a game ball into the third ball entering means. Switching can be used to create new and different game streams.

[Feature I9]
The gaming machine according to feature I8,
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (fluctuation time of the power drawer open lottery) is divided into a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. is changeable in at least two stages with time,
The assistance time, which is the time during which the assistance means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is defined as a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. changeable in at least two stages,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to feature I9, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the assisting time, the difficulty (difficulty/easiness) of entering the game ball into the third ball entering means ) can execute three different control modes, it is possible to create various new game flows using the switching of the control modes by relatively easy control.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Predetermined ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) that allows game balls to enter,
Detecting means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific position;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Distributing means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of paths,
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the detection means is arranged on one of the plurality of paths (right flow path R2).

According to the feature J1, the detecting means for detecting passage of the game ball that triggers the execution of a predetermined lottery as to whether or not the assisting means assists the entry of the game ball into the entering means is controlled by the sorting means. Since it is arranged on one path out of a plurality of distributed paths, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the game balls are distributed by the distributing means.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 33b) arranged at a position where the game ball distributed to the one path by the distribution means is not assisted by the auxiliary means. prepared,
The ball entering means for entering the game ball when assisted by the assisting means is a second ball entering means (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entering means. game machine.

According to the feature J2, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball sorted to one path by the sorting means can enter the ball when not assisted by the assisting means. In addition to giving a player a sense of expectation about the mode of distribution of the game balls by the division means, when the game balls are distributed to one path, whether the game balls enter the first ball entry means, or It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the ball will enter the second ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means, and to give at least two levels of expectation about the return of the game ball reaching the sorting means. be able to.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
a third ball entry means (first starting port 33a) disposed at a position where game balls distributed to a path (left flow path R1) different from the first path by the distribution means can enter;
a first symbol variation means for varying a first symbol when a game ball enters the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means;
a second symbol variation means for varying a second symbol when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J3, even if the game ball is sorted by the sorting means and the sorted game ball enters the first ball-entering means, the ball enters the third ball-entering means. In this case, since the first pattern, which is the same pattern, is changed in each case, the different patterns are changed with the entry of the game ball for each of the preceding ball entry means distributed by the distribution means. Unexpectedness can be imparted to a player who has guessed that the game machine is of such a configuration, and interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group K>
[Feature K1]
A first distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately distributing the reaching game balls to the first route (left flow path R1 in the second embodiment) and the second route (right flow path R2);
a second distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for distributing the game balls circulating in the second route to the third route and the fourth route;
First-class ball-entering means (first starting port) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
Type 2 ball entry means (second starting port) in which the entry of a game ball triggers the variation of the second symbol;
with
The type 1 ball entering means is arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has circulated through the first route and the third route can enter,
The second type ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has circulated through the fourth path can enter,
The gaming machine, wherein the second sorting means variably controls the probability of sorting the game balls to the fourth path.

According to the feature K1, two distribution means are provided, and the probability that the second distribution means distributes game balls to the fourth path can be changed, so that the game reached by the first distribution means Even when the balls are alternately distributed to the first path and the second path, by changing the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game balls to the fourth path, the first symbols and the A variable ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the second sorting means sets the probability of allocating the game balls to the fourth path to be low, the game balls sorted to the first path by the first sorting means , and the first symbol is varied. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second path can be distributed to the third path with a high probability by the second distribution means and entered by the first type ball entry means, and the first symbol can be varied. . That is, the game ball that has reached the first sorting means can be entered into the first type ball entering means with a high probability, and the first symbol can be changed. Further, when the second distribution means sets a high probability of distributing the game balls to the fourth path, the game balls distributed to the first path by the first distribution means are transferred to the first type ball entering means. , and the first symbol is varied. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second path can be distributed to the fourth path with a high probability by the second distribution means and entered into the second type ball entry means, and the second symbol can be varied. . In this way, by changing the probability that the second sorting means sorts game balls to the fourth path, it is possible to change the changing ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The second distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) distributes the game balls circulating through the second path to the fourth path (open state) via the first distribution means A game machine, comprising guide means for guiding a game ball circulating without being inserted into the second type ball entering means.

According to the feature K2, in the aspect of distributing the game balls circulating through the second route to the fourth route, guidance for guiding the game balls circulating without going through the first distribution means to the second type ball entering means Have the means. Therefore, by circulating the game ball in a distribution mode in which the game ball reaches the second distribution means, which is a mode of distributing to the fourth route, without passing through the first distribution means, the game ball enters the second type. It is possible to increase the probability of hitting the ball in the means, and to increase the ratio of variation of the second symbol as the ratio of variation between the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position on the second path;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The second sorting means determines, based on the result of the predetermined lottery, whether to sort the game balls circulating on the second path to either the third path or the fourth path. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature K3, the second distribution means determines whether the game balls circulating through the second route should be distributed to either the third route or the fourth route, based on the result of a predetermined lottery. Since it is determined, the player cannot recognize in advance to which of the third path or the fourth path the game balls circulating in the second path will be distributed. Therefore, the player is made to guess the result of the predetermined lottery and whether the game balls circulating through the second route will be distributed to the third route or the fourth route, and the expectation is increased. can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group L>
[Feature L1]
A first ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) that allows a game ball to enter,
a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Assisting means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
a control means for controlling the game machine;
with
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (fluctuation time of the power drawer open lottery) is divided into a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. is changeable in at least two stages with time,
The assistance time, which is the time during which the assistance means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is defined as a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. changeable in at least two stages,
As control modes, a first control mode (low-frequency support mode), a second control mode (high-frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high-frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to feature L1, the control means can switch between three control modes that differ in the probability of winning a predetermined lottery, the execution time of the lottery, and the assist time. Various game flows can be created.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
A second ball entering means (first starting port) which is a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter and is different from the first ball entering means;
a first distribution means for alternately distributing the reaching game balls to the first route (left flow path R1) and the second route (right flow path R2);
with
The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls circulating through the first path and the second path can be entered,
The detection means detects that the game ball has passed the predetermined position on the second path,
The gaming machine, wherein the auxiliary means is arranged on a path through which game balls flow from the second path to the second ball entering means.

According to the feature L2, although the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first route and the second route, the second ball entry means uses the first route and the second route. Since the distributed game balls are arranged at positions where they can be entered, it is possible to make the player make various guesses about the purpose of installing the sorting means, and to impart unexpectedness. Further, since the auxiliary means assists the game balls distributed to the second path to enter the first ball entering means, the game balls distributed to the second path by the distribution means are It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player will be assisted, and to give the player a sense of anticipation.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature group M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) that allows a game ball to enter,
Distributing means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths,
a first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting passage through a first detection position, which is a position on one of the plurality of paths;
a second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passage through a second detection position, which is a position different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
Lottery executing means for executing a predetermined lottery (power-off lottery);
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means;
with
The lottery executing means
Triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed,
Triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, the predetermined lottery is executed,
A lottery mode in which the lottery execution time is Tp from the time when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output. prepared,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, assisting the game ball that has passed the first detection position to enter the ball entering means,
When the predetermined lottery is won, assisting the game ball that has passed the second detection position to enter the ball entering means,
When the predetermined lottery is won, Tm is the time from the time when the lottery result is output to the time when the assisting means becomes in the assistable state,
When the assistance is provided in response to winning of the predetermined lottery once, an assistance mode in which the assistance time, which is the time for the assistance, is the first assistance time Ts1, and the assistance time is the first assistance time. an auxiliary mode in which the second auxiliary time Ts2 is longer than Ts1;
Tr1 is the time from when the game ball passes through the first detection position to when it reaches the auxiliary means, and Tr1 is the time from when the game ball passes the second detection position to when it reaches the auxiliary means. Tr2 and
Tf1 is the time from when the game ball that has passed through the first detection position reaches the auxiliary means until it enters the ball-entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means, and the game ball that has passed the second detection position is When the time from reaching the assisting means to entering the ball with the assistance of the assisting means is Tf2,
Tp+Tm≦Tr1
Tp+Tm≦Tr2
Tr1+Tf1≦Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≦Tp+Tm+Ts2
A game machine characterized by being.

According to feature M1, the auxiliary means comprise an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is a first auxiliary time Ts1 and an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is a second auxiliary time Ts2. In the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, when the game balls are circulated so as to pass through the first detection position, that is, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the sorting means. In this case, the game ball can enter the ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means, but when the game ball is passed through the second detection position, the game ball enters the ball entering means. Since the assisting by the assisting means ends before the ball enters, the game ball cannot enter the ball entering means. Therefore, considering the distribution mode of the game balls that are advantageous for the player, in the case of the assist mode in which the assist time is the first supplement time Ts1, the ball passes through the first detection position (reaches the sorting means). ) is more advantageous for the player than the circulation mode in which the game ball passes through the second detection position.

On the other hand, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, when the game ball is passed through the first detection position, and when the game ball is passed through the second detection position In any case, the game ball can enter the ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means. However, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, the game balls pass through the distribution means. The first detection position cannot be passed. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls that pass through the first detection position and enter the ball entry means to the number of game balls that reach the distribution means when the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution means is the number of game balls that pass through the second detection position and enter the ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls that have reached the second detection position when the game balls are circulated so as to pass through the second detection position. lower than the percentage of the number. Therefore, when considering a distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous to the player, in the case of the support mode in which the support time is the second support time Ts2, the distribution mode is such that the game balls pass through the second detection position. This is a distribution mode of game balls that is more advantageous to the player than a distribution mode in which game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position (to reach the sorting means).

Therefore, by switching the assist mode by the assisting means, it is possible to change the circulation mode of the game balls which is advantageous for the player in the circulation mode in which the game balls enter the ball-entering means with the assistance of the assisting means. A new playability can be created, and the player can be made to actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game balls, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately distributing game balls that have reached the first guide route (left flow path R1 in Modified Example 5 of the second embodiment) and the second guide route (right flow path R2) )and,
A ball-entering portion (first starting port 33a in modification 5 of the second embodiment) into which a game ball can enter;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path both guide a game ball to the same ball-entering portion.

According to the feature N1, the game balls distributed to the first guide path and the game balls distributed to the second guide path are the same regardless of the game balls distributed by the distribution means. Since the player is guided to the ball-entering portion, it is possible to make the player make various guesses about the purpose of installing the sorting means, and to give the player unexpectedness.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
When the ball-entering portion guided by both the first guide path and the second guide path is the first ball-entering portion, the ball-entering portion to which a game ball can enter is the first ball-entering portion. a second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entry portion;
a first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position, which is a predetermined position on the second guide route;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball;
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) arranged on the path through which the game ball circulates from the second guide path to the first ball entry portion, and when the predetermined lottery is won, the Auxiliary means for assisting the game ball that has reached the auxiliary means to enter the second ball entry portion;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature N2, some of the game balls distributed to the second guide path can be entered into the second ball entering section. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first ball entering section and the number of game balls entering the second ball entering section is controlled. be able to.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) that detects passing through a second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position,
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
A game machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the second detection position can reach.

According to the feature N3, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only in the second ball entering portion You can enter the ball.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
a distribution area in which game balls circulate;
Distribution route changing means (ordinary electric accessory 53 in modification 3 of the second embodiment) that is arranged in the distribution area and changes a distribution route through which game balls can be distributed;
with
The distribution route changing means is
When in the first state (closed state), the first circulation path through which the game balls can circulate (the path from the right channel R2 to the second start port 34) is blocked, and the second circulation path through which the game balls can circulate is blocked. 2 distribution routes (routes from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34) are divided,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a second state (open state), the shielding of the first distribution channel is released and the second distribution channel is formed.

According to feature O1, the distribution route changing means can change two distribution routes by shifting from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can simultaneously change the states of two types of distribution routes by one state change. As a result, in both cases of distributing game balls through the first distribution route and distributing game balls through the second distribution route, a game using the distribution route changing means can be executed. .

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
Equipped with a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery),
The distribution route changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined lottery is won, the game machine shifts from the first state to the second state.

According to the feature O2, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when the predetermined lottery is won, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation for the predetermined lottery result. can do. Further, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the probability and frequency of changing the first distribution route and the second distribution route.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O2,
A first detection means (thru gate) for detecting that a game ball has passed a first position on the first distribution route and on the upstream side with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball from the distribution route changing means. 35a) and
Second detecting means (thru gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed a second position on the second distribution route and upstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball 35b);
The lottery executing means
Triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined lottery is executed when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball.

According to feature O3, a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the first position or the second position, so various game features can be created using this property. For example, depending on the state of the game, it is controlled so that it is advantageous for the player to pass the game ball to the first position, or it is better for the player to pass the game ball to the second position. By controlling so as to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a game property that encourages the player to change the distribution mode of the game balls, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the game.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to feature O3,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the first position and is the game ball that triggered the winning is the first distribution in which the shielding is canceled by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transition from the first state to the second state occurs at a timing when the route can be circulated.

According to the feature O4, the game ball is passed through the first position and a predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the shielding of the first distribution route is released. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that the game balls cannot be distributed to the first distribution route during the period when the shielding is released and the player's expectations are lowered.

[Feature O5]
A gaming machine according to feature O3 or feature O4,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the second position and is the game ball that has triggered the winning passes through the second distribution route formed by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine shifts from the first state to the second state at a timing when distribution is possible.

According to the feature O5, when the game ball is passed through the second position to win a predetermined lottery, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the second distribution route is formed. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that the game balls cannot be distributed to the second distribution channel during the period when the second distribution channel is formed, and the player's expectation is lowered.

[Feature O6]
A gaming machine according to feature O1 to feature O5,
A ball entry means arranged at a specific position in the circulation area and capable of entering a game ball,
The specific position is
A position on the first distribution route and on the downstream side with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball from the distribution route changing means, and on the second distribution route from the distribution route changing means is located on the downstream side with respect to the direction in which game balls flow.

According to the feature O6, it is located on the first distribution route and downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, and is on the second distribution route and changes the distribution route. Since the ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the means with respect to the circulation direction of the game ball, when the circulation path change means shifts from the first state to the second state, the game ball enters the ball entry means. is likely to enter the ball, and the expectation of the player can be heightened.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
First-class ball-entering means (first starting port 33b in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means (second starting port 34) that triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol when the game ball enters;
Distributing means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for distributing arrived game balls, and when not operating, game balls circulating in a predetermined position are entered into the first type ball entering means, and when operated , a sorting means for causing the game balls circulating in the predetermined position to enter the second type ball entering means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature P1, depending on whether or not the sorting means operates, the ball-entering means for entering after the game balls that have reached the sorting means are sorted differ, and the symbols that fluctuate differ. , whether or not the sorting means operates.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific position;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role open lottery) triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting means operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to feature P2, since the distribution means operates when a predetermined lottery is won, it is possible to control the frequency with which the distribution means operates by controlling the winning probability in the predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to control the ratio of varying the first pattern and the second pattern.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P2,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific position is a position where a game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the sorting means.

According to feature P3, the specific position is a position where a game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the sorting means. It is also possible to draw attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the position. Therefore, attention can be paid to whether or not the game ball passes the specific position, and then how the game ball that has passed the specific position is distributed by the distribution means, and the game ball is distributed. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation in stages.

The inventions of the above feature group A to feature group P solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature group A to feature group P may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature described above can be applied or to which each feature is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part; and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means. machine.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32... General ball entrance 33... First start opening 34... Second start opening 34a... Electric Accessory 34b...Electric Accessory Drive Unit 35...Through Gate 36...Variable Winning Device 36a...Big Winning Port 36b...Open/Close Door 36c...Variable Winning Drive Unit 37... Special figure unit 37a... First symbol display part 37b... Second symbol display part 37c... First reservation display part 37d... Second reservation display part 38... General figure unit 39... Round display unit 40... Variable display unit 41... Liquid crystal display device 41a... Display surface 41aL... Display area 41aS... Display area 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main display section 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56 ...Case rail 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 63a...Acceptance table storage area 63b...Distribution table storage area 63c...Reach determination table storage area 63d... Variable time table storage area 63e Stop result table storage area 63f Command information storage area 64a Lottery counter buffer 64b Hold information storage area 64c Electrician hold area 64d Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 64f... Destination determination processing result storage area 67a... Various detection sensors 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81. ..Game ball launching mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power failure monitoring circuit 90...Audio light emission control device 91...Audio light emission control board 92...MPU
93... ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Variable display pattern table storage area 94a... Various flag storage areas 94b... Various counter areas 94c... Lottery counter area 100... Display control device 101 ... display control board 102 ... display side MPU
533, 633, 733, 833, 933, 1033, 1233, 1333... First starting port 1410, 1510... Electric accessories

Claims (2)

a first-class ball-entering means in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type ball entry means in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the second symbol;
The number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the number of game balls entering the second type ball entering means per unit time when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player. a control means for controlling the relative ratio of incoming balls to the number of incoming balls so that it can be changed in at least three stages;
A game machine characterized by comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means;
Assisting means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
with
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
A lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is divided into at least two stages of a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. is modifiable and
The assistance time, which is the time during which the assistance means provides the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is defined as a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. changeable in at least two stages,
As control modes, a first control mode, a second control mode, and a third control mode can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time,
A gaming machine, wherein the relative ratio of entering balls is changed by switching the control mode.

Images